JP2012130752A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent a fraudulent act causing a fraudulent winning.SOLUTION: A variable winning device determines an abnormality when a game ball is detected by a specific starting detection means in a period of an opened state or a period except a period to the time after a lapse of predetermined time from the time of a shift from the opened state to a closed state. Additionally, control is performed to at least any one advantageous state among: a state of shortening a variable display time of second identification information; a state in which a predetermined display result can be more easily derived and displayed on a second variable display means than in a normal state; and a state in which a time for bringing the variable winning device into the opened state is set longer than in the normal state. The variable display time in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state is set shorter than the predetermined time.

Description

  The present invention provides a plurality of types of first identification information capable of identifying each game ball based on detection of the game ball by the specific start detection means for detecting the game ball that has passed the first start region provided in the game area. The variable display of the second identification information is performed on the basis of the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start area provided in the game area, and the first variable display means for performing the variable display and deriving and displaying the display result. And a second variable display means for deriving and displaying the game machine, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means, the game machine shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to be advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

JP-A-5-228243

  However, if an illegal act is performed in which a game ball is forcibly awarded to a big prize opening or variable prize ball device even though the big prize opening or variable prize ball device (ordinary electric equipment) is not open The game store will suffer disadvantages.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent an illegal act that causes an illegal winning.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of types of first balls that can be identified based on the detection of the game ball by the specific start detection means that detects the game ball that has passed the first start area provided in the game area. 1st variable display means for variably displaying 1 identification information and deriving and displaying the display result; and 2nd identification information variably displayed based on the game ball passing through the second starting area provided in the game area. And a second variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means, the gaming machine shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. A variable winning device that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball does not pass through one starting area and an open state in which it can pass; and a variable winning device that is open when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means Variable input to control When a specific starting detection means detects a game ball in a period other than the period during which the apparatus control means and the variable prize-winning device are in the open state, or a predetermined time elapses from the time when the variable winning device changes from the open state to the closed state First abnormality determination means for determining an abnormality, variable display time setting means for setting a variable display time for the second identification information, a state for reducing the variable display time for the second identification information, and a second state compared to the normal state. Advantageous state control means for controlling at least one advantageous state of a state in which a predetermined display result is easily derived and displayed on the variable display means, or a state in which the time during which the variable winning device is opened is made longer than the normal state; The specific game state is controlled to either a first specific game state that gives a predetermined game value or a second specific game state that gives a game value lower than the first specific game state. A specific game state control means, a special variable winning device capable of changing from a state in which a game ball does not win in a specific gaming state to a state where it is easy to win, a special winning detection means for detecting a game ball won in the special variable winning device, When it is determined as abnormal by the second abnormality determination means and at least the second abnormality determination means that determines an abnormality when a game ball is detected by the special winning detection means in a period other than the period controlled in the specific gaming state Abnormality notification means for notifying abnormality, and the variable display time setting means sets the variable display time when the control is in an advantageous state over a predetermined time to a short time, and the second abnormality determination means is the first abnormality determination means. It is characterized in that the process for determining an abnormality is not executed regardless of whether the game is controlled to the specific game state or the second specific game state.

  In the invention described in claim 1, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that causes an illegal winning.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front of a game frame. It is a front view which shows the front of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the game frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface of a game board. It is the rear view which looked at the game board for demonstrating the installation position of an information terminal board from the back surface. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back side. It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back. It is the rear view which looked at each member which constitutes the channel of a game ball from the back. It is sectional drawing which shows the internal structure of each member which comprises the flow path of a game ball. It is sectional drawing which shows the internal structure of a ball break switch. It is a side view which shows the external appearance structure of the ball break switch seen from multiple directions. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a payout control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit structure of a ball break switch. It is an enlarged view which shows the structure of the urging means (spring) provided in the forced switch. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate and an effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an information terminal board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is a circuit diagram which shows the internal structure of an information terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring state about the ground board | substrate, the board | substrate by the side of a card unit, and a one part board | substrate by the side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure in an earth substrate. It is a connection diagram which shows each member attached to the mechanism board with a ball striking rail, a grounding board, and a card unit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit structure in a power supply board. FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control board, a relay board, a board side IC board, and a frame side IC board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the serial data output from the microcomputer for production control. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of the input timing of the serial data and clock signal to serial-parallel conversion IC, and the output timing of parallel data. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the presentation control command transmitted as a serial data system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the EXT data of an input port data designation | designated command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening opening post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening opening post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration symbol command control process. It is a flowchart which shows a command set process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the open pattern of the change time of a normal symbol, and a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory operating process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout control signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a payout control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the buffer used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning ball waiting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 3. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the state of the detection signal of a payout number count switch, and the output state of a prize ball count signal. It is a flowchart which shows an input port data confirmation process. It is a block diagram which shows the various signals output to an information terminal board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between prize ball payout detection of a payout number count switch and a prize ball signal. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the input port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process which the microcomputer for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows main control communication normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication end process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the kind of error, and the display of LED for an error display. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an input determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st door opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control content of the lamp performed according to process data, when each presentation control command is received. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the aspect of the various alerting | reporting performed in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the process table for alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a serial setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows one structural example of the data storage area | region where the lamp control signal and motor control signal of an output object are set. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a serial input / output process.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game frame 11. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the front of the game board. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine. FIG. 2 also shows an enlarged view of the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3 in the front surface of the game frame 11.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 200 (not shown in FIGS. 1 to 3; see FIGS. 7 and 8) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game attached to the inside of the outer frame 200 so as to be opened and closed. Frame 11. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. The game frame 11 includes a front frame 2a that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 200, a mechanism plate 105 (not shown in FIGS. It is a structure including various components to be attached (except for a game board to be described later).

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. . On the back surface of the glass door frame 2, as shown in FIG. 3, there is a plastic frame (plastic frame) that constitutes a part of the game frame 11. The plastic frame includes a mechanism plate 105 (see FIG. 7), and components such as a power supply circuit (not shown) and a speaker 27 are attached to the mechanism plate 105. The plastic frame in the game frame 11 is provided with a relay board 607 that relays the wiring between the game frame 11 and the game board 6. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a game board 6 is detachably attached to the front frame 2a of the game frame 11. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  Near the center of the game area 7, there is provided a variable display device (image display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display portions each variably displaying a decorative pattern for performance. The variable display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying a number of, for example, 00 to 99. Note that the special symbol display 8 is not limited to displaying a two-digit number, and may be configured to variably display a number of other digits such as 0 to 9. In addition, the variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8.

  In gaming machines, the fact that the display result of a variable display device that displays a symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) that is determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  On the right side of the special symbol display 8 is a special symbol hold composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning openings 13, 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). A storage indicator 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a first start winning opening 13 through which a game ball can be won. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  On the left side of the variable display device 9, there is provided a variable winning ball device 15 that forms a second start winning opening 14. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14, and when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14. . The variable winning ball device 15 is opened and closed by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 (easier to start winning), and it is advantageous for the player. The winning ball that has entered the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game frame 11 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4, four substrates (frame side IC substrates) 602 to 605 for mounting ICs and the like are attached to the back surface on the game frame 11 side. A frame-side IC board 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame 11 is mounted with serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 for converting serial data into parallel data. Control signals are supplied from the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 to the LEDs 281a to 281l (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l or the frame lamps 281a to 281l) constituting the ceiling lamp. Here, “lamp” and “LED” are used synonymously, but a light emitter other than LED may be used as each lamp.

  In addition, a frame-side IC substrate 603 attached to the right side (left side when viewed from the back side) of the game frame 11 is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC 613. From the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the LEDs 283a to 283e constituting the right frame lamp (hereinafter referred to as the right frame lamps 283a to 283e or the frame lamps 283a to 283e) and the right prize ball flashing when the prize ball is paid out. A control signal is supplied to an LED (hereinafter referred to as a right award ball lamp) 51b. A serial-parallel conversion IC 614 is mounted on the frame-side IC board 604 attached to the left side (right side as viewed from the back side) of the game frame 11. From the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the LEDs 282a to 282e (hereinafter referred to as the left frame lamps 282a to 282e or the frame lamps 282a to 282e) constituting the left frame lamp and the left prize ball flashing when the prize ball is paid out. A control signal is supplied to an LED (hereinafter referred to as a left prize ball lamp) 51a. Hereinafter, the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b may be collectively referred to as a prize ball lamp.

  The frame side IC board 605 attached to the lower part of the game frame 11 is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC 615 and an input IC 620 for converting parallel data into serial data. From the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, an LED 83 (hereinafter referred to as a lamp 83) that constitutes an operation button lamp provided on the operation buttons 81a to 81e and an LED 82a to 82d (a lamp 83 provided on the hitting ball supply tray 3). Hereinafter, control signals are supplied to the lamps 82a to 82d. In addition, detection signals from the operation buttons 81a to 81e are input to the input IC 620 in parallel. In addition, the figure which looked at the frame side IC board | substrate 605 from the side is also shown by FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, the frame side IC substrate 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame among the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 is equipped with two serial-parallel conversion ICs. It is configured as a collective substrate. With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate boards on which serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a relay board 607 is attached to the game frame 11 side. The wiring from the relay substrate 607 is connected to the frame side IC substrate 604, connected from the frame side IC substrate 604 to the frame side IC substrate 602, and further connected from the frame side IC substrate 602 to the frame side IC substrate 603. Further, the wiring from the relay substrate 607 is connected to the frame side substrate 605. Further, the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 and the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 604 and 605 and the relay substrate 607 are performed using connectors 156a to 156h on each substrate as shown in FIG. Connected. FIG. 4 shows a configuration in which wiring connection is made using a type of connector that connects to the board in the vertical direction. For example, a type of connector that connects to the board in the horizontal direction is used. Wire connection may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the wiring from the connector 156 a of the relay board 607 is connected to the connector 156 b of the frame side IC board 604. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 604 is further branched from the connector 156b, one is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, and the other is connected to the connector 156c. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 604, the connector 156c is arranged at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 602 side. The wiring from the connector 156c of the frame side IC substrate 604 is connected to the connector 156d of the frame side IC substrate 602. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 602 is further branched into three from the connector 156d and connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, and the connector 156e. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 602, the connector 156e is disposed at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 603 side. The wiring from the connector 156e of the frame side IC substrate 602 is connected to the connector 156f of the frame side IC substrate 603. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 603 is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613.

  Further, the wiring from the connector 156g of the relay substrate 607 is connected to the connector 156h of the frame side IC substrate 605. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 605 is further branched from the connector 156h, one is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, and the other is connected to the input IC 620.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a door opening switch (1) 154 for detecting that the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105 is opened with respect to the front frame 2a is attached above the game frame 11. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 4, a door opening switch (2) 155 for detecting that the game frame 11 itself has been opened with respect to the outer frame 200 is attached to the right side of the mechanism plate 105. ing. Details of the door opening switches (1) 154 and 155 will be described later (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the back surface of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. 5, a base (board-side IC board) 601 for mounting an IC or the like is attached to the back surface of the game board 6. On the board-side IC board 601, four serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 for converting serial data into parallel data are mounted. A control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to the motors 151a, 152a, and 153a for driving the movable members 151 to 153. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 617 to each of the LEDs 125a to 125f (hereinafter referred to as center decoration lamps 125a to 125f or lamps 125a to 125f) constituting the center decoration lamp. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 618 to the LEDs 126a to 126f (hereinafter referred to as stage lamps 126a to 126f or lamps 126a to 126f) constituting the stage lamp. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 to each of the lamps 127 a to 127 b provided in the skeleton 153 that is a movable member and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, the board side IC substrate 601 is configured as a collective substrate on which four serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted. With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate boards on which serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the gaming machine.

  The board side IC substrate 601 is equipped with an input IC 621 for converting parallel data into serial data. Detection signals from the position sensors 151b, 152b, and 153b for detecting the positions of the movable members 151 to 153 are input to the input IC 621 in parallel.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a relay board 606 is attached to the game board 6 side, and a relay board 607 is provided on the game frame 11 side. The wiring from the effect control means is first connected to the relay board 606 and further connected to the relay board 607. The wiring from the relay board 606 is connected to the board side IC board 601. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the wiring between the board side IC substrate 601 and the relay substrate 606, the wiring between the relay substrates 606 and 607, and the wiring between the relay substrate 606 and the effect control means are as shown in FIG. Are connected using connectors 157a to 157e. The connection method of the connectors 157a to 157e is the same as the connection method of the connectors 156a to 156h shown in FIG.

  An opening is formed in the upper plate of the front frame 2a above the hole for paying out the game balls, and a relay substrate 607 is provided in the opening. The relay board 607 is a board that relays through the front and back connectors. The connector 157b is disposed on the front side of the front frame 2a, and the connectors 156a and 156g are disposed on the back side. Further, the relay board 607 is disposed at the end of the opening to which the game board 6 is attached. As shown in FIG. 4, the relay board 607 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the end of the opening to which the game board 6 is attached. The relay board 607 is in a state of being shifted so that the positions of the connector 157b arranged on the front side and the connectors 156a and 156g arranged on the back side do not overlap.

  A relay board 606 is provided on the back side of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. 5, the relay board 606 is provided at the end of the game board 6 so as to be positioned in the vicinity of the relay board 607 of the plastic frame. The relay board 606 is a board that relays via a connector, and connectors 157b to 157d are arranged. The connector 157b is connected to an effect control microcomputer (an example of an electric component control microcomputer that controls electric components that are electrically driven) mounted on the game board 6.

  A prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  Next, the installation position of the information terminal board 34 and the internal configuration of the information terminal board 34 will be described. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the game board for explaining the installation position of the information terminal board as seen from the back side. As shown in FIG. 6, an information terminal board 34 is provided on the upper right side of the back surface of the game board 6. The information terminal board 34 may be installed at an arbitrary position. For example, the information terminal board 34 may be installed using an attachment member in front of the effect control board box 2000 when viewed from the back side of the game board 6. In addition, a main board box 3000 containing the main board 31 is provided at the lower part of the back side of the game board 6, and an effect control board box 2000 containing the effect control board 80 is provided at the center of the back side of the game board 6. Is provided. Further, a relay board 77 is provided in the back of the effect control board box 2000 on the back surface of the game board 6 (in the back of the effect control board box 2000 when the game board 6 is viewed from the back side).

  The information terminal board 34 has a connector CN for connecting a cable (signal line) connected to the main board 31 and a plurality of connectors CN1 for connecting a cable (signal line) connected to the hall computer. To CN9. The connector CN and the connectors CN1 to CN9 are connected via a plurality of semiconductor relays (not shown in FIG. 6).

  In general, when a gaming store newly installs (introduces) gaming machines, it is often the case that only the gaming board 6 is replaced with a new one without changing the gaming frame 11. In this case, as shown in FIG. 6, since the information terminal board 34 is provided not on the game frame 11 side but on the game board 6 side, it is output from the gaming machine to an external device such as a hall computer via the information terminal board 34. As a signal to be played, it is possible to output a signal that matches a game program of a different gaming machine. For example, in models that do not have a small hit or suddenly probable big hit, the jackpot signal is set to one type, and in models that do not have a time reduction function, a time reduction signal is not output. It is possible to output to an external device such as a hall computer.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from the back side. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the back. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the members constituting the flow path of the game ball as viewed from the back. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of each member constituting the flow path of the game ball. 7 to 10, the game board 6 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are a power supply board 910 and a launch control board 91A on which power supply circuits for creating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V and DC5V are mounted. Is provided. The power supply board 910 is accommodated in the power supply board case 910A, and the launch control board 91A is accommodated in the launch control board case.

  The power supply board 910 partially overlaps the payout control board 37, but the exposed portion exposed so as not to overlap the payout control board 37 so as to be visible from the outside has the main board 31 and each electric component in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Electric power for executing or shutting off power supply to the control boards (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) and the electric parts (parts that operate when power is supplied) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A power switch is provided as supply permitting means. Further, a replaceable fuse (see FIG. 26) is provided inside the power switch in the exposed portion (inside the substrate). The payout control board 37 is accommodated in the payout control board case 37A.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, on the upper right end (the right end when viewed from the back side), there is a wiring (external connection ground shown in FIG. 23) for grounding the gaming machine. Wiring for grounding the card unit 50 (FG harness connected to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board shown in FIG. 23) and wiring 1500 connected to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, gaming machine installation island) An earth substrate 1000 to be connected to the external connection earth shown in FIG. The configuration of the ground substrate 1000 will be described later (see FIGS. 23 to 25).

  In this embodiment, the glass door frame 2 is rotatably attached to the front side with respect to the front frame 2a (game frame 11). Further, a mechanism plate 105 is rotatably attached to the rear surface side with respect to the front frame 2a. In this embodiment, when at least one of the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105 is opened with respect to the front frame 2a, the door open switch (1) 154 detects the door open state and outputs a door open 1 signal. Output.

  Specifically, the door opening switch (1) 154 is attached in such a manner that a bar-like member with a spring passes through the front frame 2a. When a rod-like member is detected by the detection switch 154 provided on the mechanism plate 105, a signal indicating that the door is not opened is output. In this case, if the glass door frame 2 and the mechanism plate 105 are both closed, the rod-like member is pressed from the front by the glass door frame 2 and protrudes to the rear of the front frame 2a, and the detection switch 154 is moved to the door. Is not detected. When the glass door frame 2 is opened, the rod-shaped member pops out to the front side of the front frame 2a due to the elasticity of the spring, and the detection switch 154 is not pressed by the rod-shaped member. Alternatively, one or both of the mechanism plates 105) is in a state where a signal is detected that is detected to be open. Further, when the mechanism plate 105 is opened, the rod-like member is projected to the back side of the front frame 2a by the elasticity of the spring, but the detection switch 154 is not pressed by the rod-like member. Then, a signal that detects that the door (either or both of the glass door frame 2 and the mechanism plate 105) is open is output.

  The game frame 11 is attached to the outer frame 200 so as to be rotatable. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game frame 11 itself is located with respect to the outer frame 200 on the right side of the mechanism plate 105 (in this embodiment, next to the curve wall 700). A door opening switch (2) 155 for detecting that the door has been opened is attached. When the gaming frame 11 is opened with respect to the outer frame 200, the door opening switch (2) 155 detects the opened state of the gaming frame 11 and outputs a door opening 2 signal. Specifically, the door opening switch (2) 155 is provided on the mechanism plate 105, and when the gaming frame 11 is opened with respect to the outer frame 200, the opening of the gaming frame 11 is detected. A signal indicating that is output. When the game frame 11 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 200, a signal indicating that the game frame 11 is not opened is output.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the game balls stored in the game ball storage tank 38 capable of storing the balls supplied from the gaming machine installation island pass through the tank rail 160 and are divided into two rows (two items). Further, a ball payout device (payout unit) 97 covered with a case cover 731 passes through a curved bowl (also called a game ball passage) 700. Above the ball payout device 97 (on the path of the curve 樋 700), a ball break switch 197 is provided as a game ball detecting means for detecting whether or not a ball is present in the passage. When the ball break switch 197 detects a ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 stops. The ball break switch 197 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage. A ball break detection switch (not shown) for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the game ball storage tank 38 is also provided in the tank rail 160. It is provided in the upstream portion (portion close to the game ball storage tank 38). When the shortage of balls detection switch detects a shortage of game balls, a supply of gaming balls is performed to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from a supply mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, when the ball break switch 197 does not detect the presence of a game ball in the path of the curve fence 700, an operator (for example, an installer of a gaming machine, a game store) A forcible switch 400 is provided for setting the out-of-ball switch 197 to a state in which a game ball is forcibly detected in accordance with an operation of a store clerk or the like. The configurations of the ball break switch 197 and the forced switch 400 will be described later (see FIGS. 11, 12, 15, and 16).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the ball break switch 197 and the forced switch 400 are covered (covered) with a ball break switch cover 197A. The ball break switch cover 197 </ b> A has a shape that covers the entire ball break switch 197 and the force switch 400 in order to prevent the force switch 400 from being accidentally pressed. In order to allow the operator to operate the forcible switch 400, the ball break switch cover 197A can be opened and closed (for example, a lid that can be opened and closed is attached or pivotally supported via a shaft). Or it is comprised so that attachment or detachment is possible. Further, the ball-off switch cover 197A is made of, for example, a plastic material. Note that the bulb cut switch cover 197A may be formed of metal, or may be formed of a transparent material so that the inside of the cover can be visually recognized. Further, the ball break switch cover 197A has an opening (hole) 197B formed at a position corresponding to the forced switch 400 as shown in FIG. 8, and the forced switch 400 can be pushed through the opening 197B. In addition, the structure which the latching | locking part (not shown) and the opening part 197B which were provided in the predetermined position in the position which open | released the ball-off switch cover 197A may engage may be made. Further, the ball break switch cover 197A may be structured such that the game frame 11 is not closed when the ball break switch cover 197A is not in a closed state. Further, the ball break switch cover 197A may be structured such that the ball break switch cover 197A is not closed when the ball pull lever 730 is not in a normal position (a position where the ball is not removed). Further, the ball break switch cover 197A may be formed integrally with the case cover 731 of the ball dispensing device 97 (dispensing unit) or may be formed as a separate cover.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, below the ball break switch 197, a ball removal lever 730 for removing a game ball in the curve basket (game ball passage) 700 is provided. When the operator rotates the ball removal lever 730 in a predetermined direction, the ball removal valve 720 (see FIG. 11) is unlocked, and the passage through which the game ball flows is from the curve 樋 (game ball passage) 700 side to the ball removal passage. Switching to the 710 side, the game balls in the curve basket 700 are guided to the ball removal passage 710 (see FIG. 11) and discharged to the outside through the ball removal passage 710.

  The ball removal work of the game ball in the curve cage 700 is required, for example, when moving the game machine (game table), maintaining the game machine, cleaning the game machine, or discarding the game machine. Here, even if the operator causes the game ball in the curve cage 700 to be ejected by operating the ball removal lever 730, the game ball in the curve cage 700 is not completely ejected. That is, as shown in FIG. 8 and the like, the ball removal passage 710 (see FIG. 11) for discharging the game balls in the curve cage 700 to the outside is generally above the ball dispensing device 97 (upstream side, that is, a storage tank). 38), even if the operator operates the ball removal lever 730 to discharge the game ball above the ball removal passage, from the ball removal passage 710 in the curve cage 700 to the ball dispensing device 97 The game ball of the section of will remain. The reason why the ball removal passage 710 is not provided below (on the downstream side) of the ball dispensing device 97 is that when the ball removal lever 730 is operated to the ball removal passage 710 side, This is because the game ball is stopped by the ball payout device 97 and the game ball cannot be easily discharged to the outside even if the ball release lever 730 is operated.

  In order to discharge the remaining game balls in this way, it is also conceivable that the ball payout device 97 is driven by inserting the ball into the winning opening by hand to pull out the ball. However, since the ball break switch 197 is located directly above the ball removal passage, the ball break switch 197 detects a ball break when the ball is removed by the ball removal lever 730, and the ball dispensing device 97 Driving is stopped. In this case, it is conceivable to provide a forced payout switch for forcing the ball payout device 97 to execute the ball payout operation regardless of whether or not the ball is out of play, but when such a switch is provided, the forced payout switch May be illegally operated and illegal gaming balls may be paid out. It is also possible to remove the case cover 731 of the ball dispensing device 97 and scrape the ball, or manually rotate the cam (sprocket) using a screwdriver or the like to eject the ball from the ball dispensing device 97. (Worker) takes time and effort. Therefore, in this embodiment, the forcible switch 400 is provided to improve the efficiency of the ball removing operation. That is, when the operator presses the forcible switch 400, the out-of-ball switch 197 is forcibly set to a state in which a game ball is detected, and then the game ball is won in the winning opening and the ball payout device 97 is driven. The game balls are paid out.

  When a game ball payout condition based on the winning of a game ball at the winning port or the generation of a ball lending request is satisfied, the ball payout device 97 performs a game ball payout operation. That is, the payout motor 289 of the ball payout device 97 is rotated, and the payout motor 289 rotates, whereby the cam rotates through the gears to pay out the game balls one by one. In the payout control, the rotational speed of the payout motor corresponding to the designated payout number is detected by a motor position sensor (not shown), and when the payout number count switch 301 detects the number of payouts, the payout motor rotates. Stop.

  The game balls paid out by the ball paying device 97 are guided to the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 through the guide rod 430. When a large number of game balls are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 becomes full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guide passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch 48 (see FIG. 9) as a storage state detection means, and the full switch 48 is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device 97 is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped. In the state where the full switch 48 is turned on, the operation of the ball dispensing device 97 and the driving of the ball hitting device may not necessarily be stopped, or may be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed since the time of turning on. .

  Next, the operation of detecting a broken ball of the broken ball switch 197 will be described. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the ball break switch. FIG. 12 is a side view showing the external structure of the ball break switch viewed from a plurality of directions. In FIG. 11, the left figure shows a state with a game ball, and the right figure shows a state without a game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the ball break switch 197 is disposed so as to surround the two rows (two strips) of the curve rod 700. The main body 197a of the ball break switch 197 is fixed in contact with the two rows of curve rods 700 (that is, disposed in the game ball passage 700), and 2 in the main body 197a of the ball break switch 197. The contact position of the row with the curve ridge 700 is cut through in the vertical direction (that is, two openings 197h are formed). Then, two sphere detection pieces 197k protrude from the side surface of the main body 197a toward the lower inner side of the two rows of curve rods 700. The two ball detection pieces 197k are biased by biasing means (not shown) such as a spring so as to protrude inside the two rows of curve rods 700, respectively. Therefore, in the state without the game ball shown in the right diagram of FIG. 11, the ball detection piece 197k protrudes in the direction of the inside of the curve cage 700, but in the state with the game ball shown in the left diagram of FIG. The piece 197k is pushed by the game ball and pushed in the direction of the main body 197a of the ball break switch 197. When the ball detection piece 197k protrudes, the switch inside the main body 197a of the ball break switch 197 is in an open (off) state, and when the ball detection piece 197k is pushed by the game ball, the ball break switch 197 The switch inside the main body 197a is closed (off).

  As shown in FIG. 12, the ball break switch 197 is provided with a signal output terminal 401 for connecting a signal line connected to the input port of the payout control board 37 (input port 372e shown in FIG. 14). . When the switch inside the body 197a of the ball break switch 197 is in a closed (on) state, a signal indicating that a game ball is present in the curve basket 700 is paid out via a signal line connected to the signal output terminal 401. The data is input to the input port of the control board 37 and input to the payout control CPU 371 from the input port. On the other hand, when the switch inside the body 197a of the ball break switch 197 is in an open (off) state, a signal (ball break signal) indicating that there is no game ball in the curve basket 700 is connected to the signal output terminal 401. Is input to the input port of the payout control board 37 through the signal line, and is input to the payout control CPU 371 from the input port. In this embodiment, when a ball-out signal from the ball-out switch 197 is input to the payout control CPU 371, control to stop the rotation of the payout motor (stop the payout process) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the ball break switch 197 includes a ball break switch 197 that responds to the operation of the operator when the ball break switch 197 does not detect the presence of a game ball in the path of the curve rod 700. A forced switch 400 is provided to set the ball break switch 197 to a state in which a game ball is forcibly detected.

  The internal configuration (internal circuit) of the ball break switch 197 (and the forced switch 400) will be described later (see FIGS. 15 and 16).

  FIG. 11 also shows a mechanism for switching the path through which the game ball flows according to the operation of the ball removal lever 730. In the configuration shown in FIG. 11, when the operator rotates the ball removal lever 730 in a predetermined direction, the shaft 715 connected to the ball removal lever 730 moves in the right direction in the drawing. Then, with the movement of the shaft 715, the ball release valve 720 is unlocked, and the path through which the game ball flows is the ball from the curve 樋 (game ball path) 700 side (the path side guiding the game ball to the ball dispensing device 97). It switches to the extraction passage 710 side, and the ball extraction valve 720 is fixed at the position on the right side of the drawing. In this way, the game balls in the curve cage 700 are guided to the ball removal passage 710 and discharged to the outside through the ball removal passage 710.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 13 also shows a payout control board 37 and an effect control board 80 on which payout control means for controlling the ball payout device 97 to perform payout of a game ball is mounted. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. And a serial output circuit for converting parallel data into serial data and outputting the serial data. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  A random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers is connected to the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number value from the random number circuit 503 when the condition for extracting the random number value is satisfied. The random number circuit 503 is a counter that counts clock signals having a predetermined frequency, and the count value of the counter becomes a random value. A clock signal having a predetermined frequency supplied to the random number circuit 503 is input to a clear terminal of a monitoring circuit (watchdog timer (WDT)) 504. The monitoring circuit 504 is a counter that counts a clock signal having a frequency higher than the frequency of the clock signal input to the clear terminal, but the count value is reset when the clock signal input to the clear terminal becomes high level, for example. . Therefore, when the clock signal input to the clear terminal stops for some reason, the monitoring circuit 504 counts up. The fact that the monitoring circuit 504 has counted up indicates that no clock signal is supplied to the random number circuit 503. When counting up, the monitoring circuit 504 outputs a random number error signal indicating that the random number circuit 503 is not operating normally to the gaming control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a special symbol hold memory display 18 that displays the number of special symbols reserved. And the display control of the normal symbol reservation memory | storage display 41 which displays the number of reserved memory of a normal symbol is performed.

  The serial output circuit 78 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 is constituted by a shift register or the like. The serial control circuit 78 converts the presentation control command output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and sends it to the presentation control board 80 via the relay board 77. Send. The serial output circuit 78 converts the control signal output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and via the relay board 77, the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol. Output to the on-hold storage display 41. The special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10 and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 are provided with serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data, respectively. The control signal from the relay board 77 is converted into parallel data and supplied to the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via an information terminal board (board external terminal board) 34 is also a main board. 31. The information terminal board 34 is installed on the back surface of the gaming machine. The information terminal board 34 is connected only to the main board 31 (see FIG. 9).

  In addition, a backup power supply circuit 506 including a backup power supply (for example, a battery or a capacitor) 505 is mounted on the main board 31, and the door is opened even when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. A voltage from the backup power source 505 is applied to the switch (1) 154 and the door opening switch (2) 155. The backup power supply 505 may be shared with the backup power supply that supplies the RAM 55. By sharing in this way, the cost of the backup power supply can be reduced. Further, the door opening 1 signal from the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening 2 signal from the door opening switch (2) 155 are branched into two, respectively, to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power source 506. And input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  The door opening 1 signal from the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening 2 signal from the door opening switch (2) 155 are not input to the game control microcomputer 560, but only to the information terminal board 34. You may make it do.

  In this embodiment, signal lines for the door opening 1 signal from the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening 2 signal from the door opening switch (2) 155 are routed via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. Since it is physically connected to the information terminal board 34, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the door open switch 1 signal from the door open switch (1) 154 and the door open switch (2) The door open 2 signal from 155 is supplied to the information terminal board 34. In addition, since the power from the backup power source 505 mounted on the backup power supply circuit 506 is supplied to the information terminal board 34, the information terminal board 34 has the backup power source even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. The door opening 1 signal and the door opening 2 signal can be output to an external device (for example, a hall computer) via the circuit 506.

  In this embodiment, the backup power source for the RAM 55 is provided separately from the backup power source 505 installed in the backup power source circuit 506. In this embodiment, by separately providing the backup power supply as described above, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the RAM 55 from being damaged due to the door open detection state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 is used to provide effect control from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. A command is received by a serial signal system (serial communication system: a system in which data is sent out by one signal line), and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f provided on the game board 6, and is provided on the frame side. The top frame lamps 281a to 281l, the left frame lamps 282a to 282e and the left award ball lamp 51a, the right frame lamps 283a to 283e and the right award ball lamp 51b are displayed, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. .

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, 51a, 51b output by the effect control means. A serial output circuit 353 for converting a parallel data control signal to serial data is mounted. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 is equipped with a serial input circuit 354 that converts the input serial data into parallel data and outputs the parallel data to the effect control means. Therefore, the effect control means outputs the control signals in the serial signal system via the serial output circuit 353, thereby allowing the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, 51a, Display control 51b (specifically, light emission control, that is, lighting control (flashing control)) is performed.

  On the game board side, a board-side IC board 601 on which a serial-parallel conversion IC for converting serial data into parallel data is mounted. The board side IC substrate 601 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606. On the game frame 11 side, frame-side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, and 605 on which serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data are provided. Each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606, 607.

  The effect control board 80, the relay board 606, and the relay board 607 are connected by one bus type wiring route.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 14, the payout control board 37 includes a payout control microcomputer 370 including an payout control CPU 371 (an example of an electric component control microcomputer that controls electrically driven electric components). Has been. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control CPU 371, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The detection signal of the full switch 48 is input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout number count switch 301 is a switch that detects a game ball paid out based on a winning and a game ball paid out based on a ball lending request from the card unit 50, and outputs a detection signal. A detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor 289 is provided in the ball payout device 97 and rotates to pay out payout game balls stored on the back surface of the game machine. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. It is done. In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates that the ball is out of ball, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates that the ball is full. Then, the ball payout process is stopped. Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full tank state, the ball launching from the ball striking device is stopped. Note that even when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the ball firing from the ball striking device may not be stopped. When the signal line from the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to the ball hitting device, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the ball shot from the ball hitting device. Also good.

  When there is a winning game ball at the winning opening, a prize ball number signal (payout number data) indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a prize ball number signal are fetched from the output circuit 67 of the main board 31 as a payout command signal. A prize ball REQ signal (capture request signal) requesting (reception) is output (transmitted). Specifically, it is turned on. The award ball number signal is composed of 4-bit data (binary 4-digit data) and is output through four signal lines. Note that the on state of the signal, that is, the output state is a state where the signal is significant, and turning on means that the signal receiving side is instructed to start some processing based on the signal. To do. For example, when the prize ball number signal indicating the number of prize balls and the prize ball REQ signal are turned on, the microcomputer 370 is commanded to recognize the number of prizes indicated by the prize ball number signal. Means that. Alternatively, the signal may be turned on by outputting a signal, and the signal may be turned off by stopping the signal output. However, a signal corresponding to the on state is output when the signal is turned on, and the signal is output according to the off condition when the signal is turned off. Alternatively, the on state and the off state may be switched by outputting a signal.

  The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal are input to the I / O port 372e via the input circuit 373A. When the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number signal via the I / O port 372e, the payout control microcomputer 370 controls to drive the ball payout device 97 to pay out the number of game balls indicated by the prize ball number signal. The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal correspond to a payout command signal for designating the number of payouts.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, the description is omitted in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 66 is connected to a power display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62, and a return switch 63 (not shown in FIG. 1) provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3. .

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, an interface board 66 (game ball lending device connection terminal board shown in FIG. 23) is interposed. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 50. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 50 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 50, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 37. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 37.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, when a BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in an ON state, a prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  In this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs signals corresponding to detection signals of the full switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301 to the main board 31 via the output port 372b and the output circuit 373B. However, the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187 and the payout count switch 301 that are input to the payout control microcomputer 370 are branched at the payout control board 37, and the branched detection signal is output to the output circuit 373B. Via the main board 31. In such a configuration, the payout control microcomputer 370 need not output from the output port 372b signals corresponding to the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301.

  FIG. 15 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit configuration of a ball break switch. In the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 15, the switch SW1 provided in the ball break switch 197 is a switch corresponding to one of the two ball detection pieces 197k, and the switch SW2 is a switch for detecting two balls. It is a switch corresponding to the other sphere detection piece among the pieces 197k. Terminals 1 and 2 are the signal output terminals 401 shown in FIGS. 11 and 12.

  As shown in FIG. 15, when both the switches SW1 and SW2 are in the closed state (on state), the terminals 1 and 2 are short-circuited, and a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected from the signal output terminal 401 is for payout control. The data is output to the microcomputer 370. On the other hand, when at least one of the switches SW1 and SW2 is in an open state (off state), the terminals 1 and 2 remain open, indicating that no game ball is detected from the signal output terminal 401. A signal (ball break signal) is output.

  In the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 15, the switch SW3 provided in the ball break switch 197 is used when the ball break switch 197 does not detect the presence of a game ball in the curve 樋 700 passage. This is a forcible switch 400 that sets the out-of-ball switch 197 to a state in which a game ball is forcibly detected in accordance with an operation. As shown in FIG. 15, the switch SW3 (forced switch 400) is connected in parallel with the switches SW1 and SW2. Therefore, even if one or both of the switches SW1 and SW2 are in the open state, when the forced switch SW3 is in the closed state, the terminals 1 and 2 are short-circuited, and the game ball is detected from the signal output terminal 401. Is output to the payout control microcomputer 370. As a result, when the forcible switch 400 is pressed, the out-of-ball switch 197 is forcibly set to detect a game ball.

  FIG. 16 is an enlarged view showing the configuration of the urging means (spring) provided in the forced switch. As shown in FIG. 16, when one end surface of the forcible switch 400 is pushed by the operator, the contact point 403 provided on the other end surface of the forcible switch 400 is contacted with the contact point of the substrate 404 provided inside the ball break switch 197. The switch SW3 is in a closed state (on state). Here, the forced switch 400 has one end fixed inside the ball break switch 197 and the other end fixed to the force switch 400 by a spring 402 (biasing means). It is biased in the direction of the arrow in the right figure of FIG. Therefore, only when the operator presses the forcible switch 400, both the contacts come into contact and the switch SW3 is closed. When the operator releases the hand from the forcible switch 400, both the contacts are separated and the switch SW3 is in the open state. It becomes.

  Thus, the forced switch 400 is maintained in the open state (off state) by the urging means when not pressed by the operator, so even if the operator accidentally presses the forced switch 400, the forced switch 400 is forced. The closed state (ON state) of the switch 400 is not maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the game is started in the closed state due to the forced switch 400 being pressed by mistake, and the ball payout process is continued even though the ball breaks after that. Further, as described above, since the ball break switch 197 including the force switch 400 is covered with the ball break switch cover 197A (see FIG. 8), it is prevented that the operator presses the force switch 400 by mistake. be able to.

  Note that the forcible switch 400 forces the game ball detection means to exist according to the operation of the operator when the game ball detection means (ball break detection switch 197) does not detect the game ball. For example, when the game ball detection means is not detecting a game ball, the game ball detection means forcibly acts on the state in which the game ball detection means detects the game ball according to the operation of the operator. As long as it is configured, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, the forced switch 400 is attached in a protruding direction from the main body 197a of the ball break switch 197 by a spring (biasing means) having one end fixed and the other end connected to the forced switch 400 via a fulcrum (support shaft). You may be forced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16 described above, the forcible switch 400 is a push button type switch, but is not limited to such a configuration, such as a lever type switch (a switch that contacts when a lever is pulled). It may be. That is, it has a contactor capable of reciprocating between the first position and the second position, the contactor is turned on when contacting the contact at the first position, and the contactor is turned off when separated from the contact at the second position. I just need it. In addition, as an urging means, a spring that applies a physical force in the direction in which the switch SW3 opens by the drag of the plastic deformation region is taken as an example. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the switch SW3 releases the force by gravity. The switch SW3 may be distorted when a force is applied, and the switch SW3 is closed, and the switch SW3 is returned to the original state when the force is not applied. Further, the side surface of the main body 197a of the ball break switch 197 to which the forced switch 400 is attached is formed of a deformable plastic material. When the operator presses the forced switch 400, the plastic main body 197a itself is deformed, and the operator When the forced switch 400 is not pressed, the plastic main body 197a may be configured to return to the original position by the drag in the plastic deformation region.

  FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80. In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 17 shows the case where only the effect control board 80 is provided regarding the effect control, a lamp driver board and an audio output board may be provided. In this case, the lamp driver board and the sound output board are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101, a RAM (not shown), a serial output circuit 353, a serial input circuit 354, a clock signal output unit 356 and an input capture signal output unit 357. It is installed. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the serial input circuit 102 and the input port 103. In this case, the serial input circuit 102 converts the effect control command received by the serial signal method into parallel data and outputs the parallel data. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. The VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 17 illustrates a diode.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving a lamp (in some cases, it may be an LED) via the serial output circuit 353. The serial output circuit converts the input signal for driving the lamp (parallel data) into serial data and outputs the serial data to the relay board 606. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173.

  Further, the clock signal output unit 356 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 and the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 via the relay substrates 606 and 607. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the input IC 621 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrate 606. Therefore, in this embodiment, a common clock signal is supplied to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and the input ICs 620 and 621.

  Further, the input capture signal output unit 357 inputs the input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC board 601 or the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607 in accordance with the instruction of the effect control CPU 101. Is output. The input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605 latches the detection signals of the operation buttons 81a to 81e when the input capture signal from the production control microcomputer 100 is input, and relays boards 606 and 607 as a serial signal system. To the production control microcomputer 100. The input IC 621 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b, 152b, and 153b when the input capture signal from the production control microcomputer 100 is input, and uses a serial signal method. This is output to the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 606.

  When the sound number IC 173 receives the sound number data, the sound synthesizing IC 173 generates a sound or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the information terminal board 34. In the example shown in FIG. 18, a signal is input to the information terminal board 34 from the main board 31 via the cable 343 and the connector 341. A signal input via the cable 343 is output to, for example, a hall computer via the driver circuit 345, the connector 347, and the cable 349.

  Conventionally, a signal from an information terminal board (board external terminal board) for inputting a signal from the main board 31 and outputting it to an external apparatus such as a hall computer and a signal from the payout control board 37 are inputted and outputted to the external apparatus. Information terminal board (frame external terminal board) is provided separately, or a signal from the main board 31 and a signal from the payout control board 37 are input and output to an external device Two information terminal boards (frame board and external terminal board) were provided. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, only one information terminal board (board external terminal) is connected to only the main board 31 and outputs a signal input from the main board 31 to an external device. Substrate) 34 is provided. A signal from the payout control board 37 is input to the main board 31 and is output from the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34. According to such a configuration, since the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 are connected in advance, the operator only connects the information terminal board 34 and the main board 31 when wiring the information terminal board 34. In other words, the wiring process for the information terminal board 34 is facilitated.

  19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 19, the output port 0 is an output port for a payout command signal (award ball number signal, award ball REQ signal) and a power supply confirmation signal transmitted to the payout control board 37. The high level “1” of the prize ball number signal corresponds to the ON state, and the high level “1” of the power confirmation signal corresponds to the ON state (a state where power is supplied). Further, the low level “0” of the prize ball REQ signal corresponds to an ON state (a state where a payout request is made).

  From the output port 1, a solenoid (large winning opening door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball apparatus 20 for opening and closing a large winning opening and a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are opened. The drive signal for is output.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the output ports 2 and 3 are output ports for signals output to the information terminal board 34 (via the hall computer). From the output port 2, a symbol determination number signal, a start port 1 signal, a start port 2 signal, a big hit 1 signal, a big hit 2 signal, a time reduction signal, and a probability variation signal are output. The signal output from the output port 2 is a control information signal generated during the execution of the game control process.

  Also, a prize ball information signal (also called a prize ball signal or payout information) is output from the output port 3. The signal output from the output port 3 is a signal input from the payout control board 37 to the main board 31.

  The output ports 1 to 3 are part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is being output”.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 21, the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 include the count switch 23, the gate switch 32a, the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, and 30a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the first starting port, respectively. A detection signal of the switch 13a is input.

  In addition, a prize ball count signal, a full tank signal, a ball runout signal, and a payout error signal from the payout control board 37 are input to bits 0 to 3 of the input port 1, respectively. The high level “1” of the prize ball count signal corresponds to the ON state (the state where the payout number count switch 301 is ON). The high level “1” of the full signal corresponds to the on state (the full switch 48 is on). The high level “1” of the ball break signal corresponds to the on state (the state in which the ball break switch 187 is turned on). A high level “1” of the payout error signal corresponds to an ON state (a state in which a payout error has occurred).

  Further, the door opening 1 signal from the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening 2 signal from the door opening switch (2) are input to the bits 4 and 5 of the input port 1, respectively. A high level “1” of the door opening 1 signal corresponds to a state where the door opening switch (1) 154 does not detect the opening of the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105 (a state where the door is closed). The high level “1” of the door opening 2 signal corresponds to a state where the door opening switch (2) 155 does not detect the opening of the game frame 11 (a state where the door is closed).

  In addition, a random number error signal from the monitoring circuit 504 is input to bit 6 of the input port 1. A low level “0” of the random number error signal corresponds to an ON state (a state in which a random number error has occurred). That is, the monitoring circuit 504 maintains the random number error signal at a high level when normal, but changes the random number error signal to a low level when abnormal.

  The bit 1 of the input port 2 receives a clear switch detection signal (clear signal) from the power supply board. The clear switch is a switch that can be operated by a game clerk or the like, and is a switch that is operated when the RAM 55 is to be initialized. The winning ball BUSY signal from the payout control board 37 is input to bit 2 of the input port 2. The prize ball BUSY signal is a signal that is output when a prize ball is being paid out. The input ports 0 to 2 are part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is input”.

  Note that logic opposite to the “logic” shown in FIGS. 19 to 21 may be used. For example, an input signal in which 1 is on may be an input signal in which 0 is on. The ports (output port, input port) shown in FIGS. 19 to 21 are ports that can be accessed at one time, that is, ports that can be accessed by the same interrupt.

  FIG. 22 is a circuit diagram showing the internal configuration of the information terminal board. In the information terminal board 34 shown in FIG. 22, the left connector CN corresponds to the connector 341 for connecting the cable 343 for transmitting the signal from the main board 31 shown in FIG. 18, and the right connectors CN1 to CN9 are This corresponds to the connector 347 for connecting the cable 349 for transmitting a signal to the hall computer shown in FIG. Semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC9 correspond to the driver circuit 345 shown in FIG.

  When the cable 343 from the main board 31 is connected to the connector CN, various signals are input to the information terminal board 34 from the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560). Specifically, the start port 1 signal is input to the terminal “2” of the connector CN, the start port 2 signal is input to the terminal “3” of the connector CN, and the symbol determination frequency signal is input to the terminal “4” of the connector CN. 1 signal is input to terminal “5” of connector CN, 2 signals of jackpot are input to terminal “6” of connector CN, a time reduction signal is input to terminal “7” of connector CN, and connector CN The probability variation signal is input to the terminal “8”, and the prize ball signal is input to the terminal “9” of the connector CN.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the information terminal board 34, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the terminal “1” of the connector CN, the signal line branches, and the input terminals “1” of the respective semiconductor relays PC1 to PC8. "It is connected to the. The signal lines connected to the terminals “2” to “9” of the connector CN are connected to the input terminals “2” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC8 via the 1 KΩ resistors R1 to R8, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “4” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC8 are connected to the terminals “1” of the connectors CN1 to CN8, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “3” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC8 are connected to the terminals “2” of the connectors CN1 to CN8, respectively.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, regarding the door opening signal, the detection signal from the door opening switch (1) 154 (door opening 1 signal) and the detection signal from the door opening switch (2) 155 (door opening 2 signal). Is input to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. And it inputs into the semiconductor relay 9 mounted in the information terminal board 34. FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the input terminal “1” of the semiconductor relay PC 9 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. A ground line is connected to the input terminal “2” of the semiconductor relay PC9 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. The signal line connected to the output terminal “4” of the semiconductor relay PC9 is connected to the terminal “1” of the connector CN9. The signal line connected to the output terminal “3” of the semiconductor relay PC9 is connected to the terminal “2” of the connector CN9. In this embodiment, the backflow prevention diode 506a is provided on the input side of the reference potential of the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31, so that it is other than the semiconductor relay PC9 provided on the information terminal board 34. Thus, the current from the backup power source 505 is prevented from being supplied to each circuit and each circuit element.

  In this embodiment, expressions such as “door open 1 signal from door open switch (1) 154 and door open 2 signal from door open switch (2) 155 are input” are used. Specifically, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 22, when one or both of the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening switch (2) 155 are turned on (energized state), the door opening switch ( 1) A detection signal from one or both of 154 and door opening switch (2) 155 is input to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. In this embodiment, expressions such as “door open 1 signal is input from door open switch (1) 154” are used. Specifically, the door open switch (1) 154 includes the door open switch (1) 154. The detection switch detects the opening of the door (glass door frame 2 or mechanism plate 105) and outputs a door opening 1 signal, and the door opening 1 signal is sent to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. Or the effect control board 80.

  In the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC9, when a signal current flows through the input terminal, the light emitting element (LED) on the input side emits light. The emitted light is applied to the photoelectric element (solar cell) provided opposite to the LED through the transparent silicon. The photoelectric element that has received the light is exchanged for voltage according to the amount of light, and this voltage passes through the control circuit to charge the MOSFET gate of the output section. When the MOSFET gate voltage supplied from the photoelectric element reaches the set voltage value, the MOSFET becomes conductive and turns on the load. When the signal current at the input terminal is cut off, the light emitting element (LED) stops emitting light. When the light emission of the LED stops, the voltage of the photoelectric element decreases, and when the voltage supplied from the photoelectric element decreases, the gate load of the MOSFET is rapidly discharged by the control circuit. With this control circuit, the MOSFET is turned off and the load is turned off.

  By the operation of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC8 as described above, signals input from the input side connector CN are transmitted to the output side connectors CN1 to CN8 and output to the hall computer. Specifically, the start port 1 signal is output from the connector CN1, the start port 2 signal is output from the connector CN2, the symbol determination number signal is output from the connector CN3, the jackpot 1 signal is output from the connector CN4, and the connector CN5. 2 signals are output from the jack, a time-short signal is output from the connector CN6, a probability variation signal is output from the connector CN7, and a prize ball signal is output from the connector CN8. Further, by the operation of the semiconductor relay PC9 as described above, the door opening 1 signal and the door opening 2 signal input via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31 are transmitted to the output side connector CN9 and are sent to the hall computer. Are output.

  As described above, by providing the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC9 on the information terminal board 34, signal input from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine can be prevented, and as a result, illegal acts can be reliably prevented. . In the above example, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC9 are provided on the information terminal board 34, but other relay elements such as a mechanical relay may be used instead of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC9.

  In this embodiment, the door opening 1 signal from the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening 2 signal from the door opening switch (2) 155 are connected to the information terminal via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. Since the power is input to the board 34, the power of the backup power supply 505 mounted on the backup power supply circuit 506 is the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening switch (2) 155 even when the gaming machine is turned off. The door opening 1 signal and the door opening 2 signal are transmitted to the output-side connector 9 and output to the hall computer.

  Further, in this embodiment, the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening switch (2) 155 are in the off state (non-opening) when the door (the glass door frame 2 and the mechanism plate 105) and the game frame 11 are not opened. Energized state), and when opened, it is energized and turned on. Therefore, when the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening switch (2) 155 are configured to be in an on state when the door or the game frame 11 is not opened and to be in an off state when opened. In comparison, power consumption can be reduced. As the door opening switch (1) 154 and the door opening switch (2) 155, when the door (the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105) or the game frame 11 is not opened, it is on (energized) and opened. It is also possible to use one that is in a non-energized state and is in an off state when it is turned on.

  Next, the ground wiring connection in the gaming machine and the card unit 50 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a circuit diagram showing a wiring state of the ground board, the card unit side board, and a part of the game machine side board. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a configuration in the ground substrate. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the ground substrate 1000 has a connector CN1 for connecting one external connection ground that is connected to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine installation island) and grounded, and the gaming machine main body. Connector CN2 for connecting one FG harness to be connected to two and two ground boards connected to a lending device connecting terminal board 66 such as a game ball (the same board as the interface board 66 shown in FIG. 13) A connector CN3 for connecting the harness is provided. Then, in the ground substrate 1000, as shown in FIG. 24, the wiring 1001 from the connector CN1 and the wiring 1002 from the connector CN2 are connected at the connection point, and the two wirings 1003 and 1004 from the connector CN3 are connected. The connection points of the wirings 1001 and 1002 and the connection points of the wirings 1003 and 1004 are connected by the wiring 1005.

  In the gaming machine, game balls pass from the installation island through the storage tank 38, from the storage tank 38 through the tank rail 160 and the curve rod 700 to the ball dispensing device 97, and from the ball dispensing device 97 through the guide rod 430 to the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate). ) 350, in the process from the hitting ball supply tray 350 through the hitting rail to the game area, the game balls and the contact area between the game ball and the game ball in the gaming machine may come into contact with each other to generate static electricity. Also, static electricity can be generated in the card unit 50. Furthermore, there is a possibility that electric leakage occurs in the card unit 50. In such a case, static electricity or electric leakage leads to malfunction or failure of the control unit (microcomputer or the like) in the gaming machine or the control unit in the card unit 50. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. By connecting the FG harness and the ground board harness to the ground board 1000, the gaming machine main body and the card unit 50 are both connected to the outside of the gaming machine and grounded.

  Here, in the ground board 1000, the external connection ground and the FG harness are connected, and the external connection ground and the ground board harness are connected to the grounding wiring of the gaming machine main body to the game machine installation operator. This is to make sure that the connection is made and to reduce the wiring work when installing the gaming machine.

  That is, conventionally, no grounding board is provided, and the card unit 50 (that is, a gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 66 having terminals (connectors) for wiring connection of the card unit 50 to other boards). And the gaming machine main body are connected by two FG harnesses, and the gaming machine main body and the outside of the gaming machine are connected by an external connection ground. In this case, when installing the gaming machine, the gaming machine installation operator needs to connect (wiring) the card unit 50 and the gaming machine main body and connect (wiring) the gaming machine main body and the outside of the gaming machine. There is. For this reason, it may occur that the wiring connection between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine main body or the wiring connection between the gaming machine main body and the gaming machine main body is forgotten. In addition, the wiring work for installing a large number of gaming machines also increases.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in this embodiment, a ground board 1000 is provided, and an external connection ground from the outside of the game, an FG harness from the gaming machine body, and a ground from the card unit 50 are provided. Since the wiring harness is connected (wired) to the grounding board 1000 and the wiring is connected to the grounding board 1000, the installation operator connects the grounding board 1000 and the game machine main body with the FG harness (wiring). ) Just do it. This is because, unlike a gaming machine, the card unit 50 is not a device that is frequently replaced, but is installed (fixed) in advance, so that the card unit 50 and the ground substrate 1000 are already connected (wired). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of wiring work for the game machine installation operator and to make sure that the ground wiring connection of the gaming machine main body is performed.

  In addition, when changing the model of a gaming machine, only the gaming board 6 is generally replaced. In this embodiment, the ground wire (FG harness) that connects the ground substrate 1000 and the gaming machine main body is connected to the mechanism plate 105 on the gaming machine side. If the ground wire is connected to the game board 6, the ground wire must be connected to the game board 6 every time the model is changed, and the installer may forget to connect the ground wire. However, since the ground wire is connected to the mechanism plate 105, it is not necessary to connect the ground wire to the gaming machine when changing the model of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the surge absorber 1100 is arranged on the wiring 1002 from the connector CN2 in the ground substrate 1000. A surge absorber (also referred to as a surge protector) is an element used to protect equipment and facilities from surges generated by lightning, switching, electrostatic discharge, etc., that is, transient excessive voltage. An induced lightning surge caused by a lightning strike, an open / close surge generated by opening / closing a switch or a relay, an electrostatic surge, etc. all cause malfunction of the device or destruction of internal components or the device itself. For this reason, a surge absorber is used to absorb and limit the surge voltage so as not to affect the circuit.

  A surge absorber is a voltage-dependent element and has a high resistance in a normal state, but limits the voltage by rapidly decreasing the resistance when the applied voltage exceeds a certain voltage. The operation at this time includes a clamping type that works to keep the voltage at a constant value, and a switching type that rapidly conducts when the voltage exceeds a predetermined value and greatly reduces the voltage across the element. There is.

  Examples of the clamping type include a varistor (metal oxide varistor) and a Zener diode. The varistor is a voltage-dependent resistance element, and exhibits high resistance when the voltage is small. However, when a voltage higher than a specified voltage is applied, the varistor becomes conductive and a large current flows. Examples of the switching type include discharge tubes and thyristors. A discharge type (gap type) such as a gas surge arrester has a structure in which a discharge electrode is opposed to a glass or ceramic hermetic container and air or an inert gas (for example, nitrogen gas) is filled therebetween. Although it is an open state in a normal state, when a surge voltage is applied, an arc discharge occurs between the electrodes, and a short circuit is caused to limit the surge voltage.

  The reason why the surge absorber 1100 is disposed on the wiring 1002 from the connector CN2 on the gaming machine main body side in the ground substrate 1000 is to absorb a surge voltage based on the charging (static electricity) of the gaming ball in the gaming machine. Further, if the gaming machine and the card unit 50 are configured to be connected to the ground in the ground substrate 1000 in common, a surge voltage (100V in case of electric leakage, several in the case of static electricity) based on electric leakage or electrostatic noise from the card unit 50 side. This is because kV) may flow into the gaming machine side and prevent such surge voltage from flowing into the gaming machine side. When leakage or electrostatic noise occurs in the card unit 50, the surge voltage is transmitted to the ground substrate 1000 through the ground substrate harness. At this time, if the surge absorber 1100 is not provided on the ground board 1000, the surge voltage from the card unit 50 side is transmitted to the gaming machine main body side. However, as shown in FIGS. Since the surge absorber 1100 is provided on 1000, the surge voltage is absorbed and limited by the surge absorber 1100.

  In this embodiment, the surge absorber 1100 gradually discharges the surge voltage to absorb and limit it. As described above, there are various types of surge absorbers, but it is necessary to select the type of surge absorber 1100 according to the purpose. That is, parameters (characteristics) such as voltage-current characteristics, surge resistance (current resistance or energy resistance), response time, capacitance, and leakage current differ depending on the type of surge absorber. 1100 must be selected. For example, surge absorbers designed to absorb and limit surge voltage based on leakage current, surge absorbers designed to absorb and limit surge voltage based on electrostatic noise, surge voltage based on leakage and electrostatic noise A surge absorber or the like intended to be limited is appropriately selected and placed on the ground substrate 1000. The surge absorber 1100 may be a clamping type, a switching type, or a combination of a plurality of surge absorbers.

  When the purpose is to absorb and limit the surge voltage due to the leakage of the card unit 50, the operation start voltage of the surge absorber 1100 (voltage at which the characteristic (resistance value) changes) is set to be higher than the voltage used in the gaming machine. It is preferable that the voltage be higher than the voltage used in the card unit 50. For example, in this embodiment, the voltage used in the gaming machine (the operating voltage of the microcomputers 560, 370, 100) is 24V AC, whereas the voltage used in the prepaid card unit 50 is 100V AC (note that FIG. In the configuration shown in FIG. 23, a power supply voltage of 24V AC is supplied from the payout control board 37 to the card unit 50 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 66. The basic operating voltage of the unit 50 is 100V). In this case, the surge absorber 1100 is used such that the operation start voltage of the surge absorber 1100 is a voltage between 24V and 100V. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a surge voltage due to leakage from the card unit 50 side from flowing into the gaming machine side. In this embodiment, the surge absorber 1100 is detachable and replaceable.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 23, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 66 (the same board as the interface board 66 shown in FIG. 20) includes terminals (connectors) for wiring connection of the card unit 50 to other boards. Substrate. As shown in FIG. 23, the connector CN1 of the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 66 and the connector CN3 of the ground substrate 1000 are connected by the ground substrate harness, and the connector CN2 of the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 66 and the payout control are provided. The connector CN7 of the board 37 is connected with a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board harness, the connector CN3 of the gaming ball lending apparatus connection terminal board 66 and a balance display board (a display (frequency display LED 60 for displaying the balance of the prepaid card). Board CN) connector CN1 is connected by a balance display board harness, and connector CN4 of game ball lending device connection terminal board 66 and card unit 50 connector (not shown) are connected to a plurality of signal lines (harnesses). ).

  It should be noted that signals input / output between the connector CN4 of the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 66 and the connector (not shown) of the card unit 50 (that is, signals transmitted and received between the gaming machine and the card unit 50). ): AC24V power supply, PSI signal (connection confirmation signal), SEGA signal to SEGG signal (7 segment A signal to 7 segment G signal; referred to as display data signal), LG (ground for DC + 18V power supply), TDLO signal (rental ball) Displayable signal), BRDY signal, EXS signal, PRDY signal, DG1 signal to DG3 signal (first digit 7-segment LED common signal to third digit LED common signal; referred to as strobe signal), VL (DC + 18V power supply), TDS signal ( Ball lending switch signal), RES signal (return switch signal), BRQ signal, FG (frame graph) Command; earth), it has become a AC24V power. Note that “FG” of the connector number “24” in the connector CN4 of the lending device connection terminal board 66 such as a game ball and the ground terminal of the card unit 50 are connected by wiring.

  The connector CN1 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN2 of the power supply board 910 are connected by a payout control board power harness, and the connector CN2 of the payout control board 37 and the main control board (main board 31) are connected by a plurality of signal lines. The connector CN3 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN3 of the plastic frame relay board are connected by the plastic frame relay board harness, and the connector CN4 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN1 of the payout relay board are the payout relay board harness. The connector CN5 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN3 of the sunpack relay board are connected by a sunpack relay board harness, and the connector CN6 of the payout control board 37 and the inspection device are connected by a plurality of signal lines (harnesses). Has been.

  Further, the connector CN1 of the plastic frame relay board and the full tank switch 48 are connected by a full tank switch harness, and the connector CN2 of the plastic frame relay board and the connector CN2 of the launch control board 91A are connected by a launch control board harness. . The connector CN2 of the launch control board 91A is connected to the launch lever (touch sensor) and the single launch switch harness by a single launch switch harness, and the connector CN3 of the launch control board 91A is connected to the launch motor by a launch motor harness. . Further, the connector CN1 of the sunpack relay board and the ball break switch 197 are connected by a ball break switch harness, and the connector CN2 of the sunpack relay board and the door opening switch 1, 2 (door opening switch (1) 154, door opening switch). (2) 155) is connected to the door switch harness.

  Further, the connector CN2 of the payout relay board and the payout number count switch are connected by the payout number count switch harness, the connector CN3 of the payout relay board and the connector CN1 of the payout sensor board are connected by the payout sensor harness, and The connector CN4 and the payout motor are connected by a payout motor harness.

  Further, the connector CN1 of the power supply board 910 and the power supply (AV24V) are connected by a power cord, the connector CN3 of the power supply board 910 and the main control board (main board 31) are connected by a main control board power supply harness, and the power supply board 910 is connected. The connector CN4 and the frame serial relay board are connected by a frame serial relay board power harness, and the connector CN5 of the power board 910 and the effect control board 80 are connected by an effect control board power harness.

  FIG. 25 is a connection diagram showing each member attached to the mechanism board together with the ball striking rail, the ground substrate, and the card unit. In the configuration shown in FIG. 25, the ball striking rail (the firing rail 440, the outer rail 441 and the inner rail 442; see FIG. 3) is made of stainless steel, and the firing rail 440, the outer rail 441 and the inner rail 442 are games. When is performed, it is electrically conductive. Although not shown in FIG. 25, a stainless steel rail is also disposed in the passage of the hit ball supply tray 3 and is electrically connected to the firing rail 440 and the like.

  The guide rod 430 is a member that guides the game ball paid out from the ball payout device 97 to a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 provided on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The induction rod 430 is made of carbon resin and is in contact with the ground plate 431. The firing rail 440 and the guide rod 430 are connected by a wiring 2008 via a hinge portion. In addition, the guide rod 430 is connected to a receiving metal fitting 411 connected to the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 by a wiring 2007. The metal fitting 410 and the receiving metal fitting 411 are made of stainless steel. Therefore, the potential of the hitting rail and the guide rod 430 is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105.

  The storage tank 38 is made of carbon resin, and a ground plate 381 is attached to a part of the storage tank 38. The storage tank 38 is connected to the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 by wiring 2005. Therefore, the potential of the storage tank 38 is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105.

  The case cover 731 is made of polycarbonate. A stainless steel presser fitting 732 is in contact with the case cover 731. Further, the presser fitting 732 is connected to the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 by the wiring 2006. Therefore, the potential of the case cover 731 is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105.

  Therefore, the potential of the batting rail which becomes the passage of the game ball launched from the launching device, the storage tank 38 which is the main part of the passage of the game ball to be paid out, the ball passage in the ball dispensing device 97 and the guide rod 430 is It is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of 105.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the metal fitting 410 is connected to the outside of the gaming machine (installed island) via the earth substrate 1000 and is grounded. That is, the metal fitting 410 and the ground substrate 1000 are connected by the wiring 2004 (FG harness), and the ground substrate 1000 and the outside of the gaming machine (installed island) are connected by the wiring 2001 (external connection ground). Therefore, the potentials of the ball striking rail, the storage tank 38, the ball passage in the ball dispensing device 97, the guide rod 430, and the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 are at the ground level. As described above, the surge absorber 1100 is provided on the path from the gaming machine main body (the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105) to the outside of the gaming machine in the ground substrate 1000. The surge absorber 1100 can gradually discharge and absorb static electricity based on the charging of game balls in the gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the card unit 50 is connected to the outside of the gaming machine via an interface board (game ball lending device connection terminal board) 66 and a ground board 1000 and is grounded. That is, the card unit 50 and the interface board 66 are connected by the wiring 2002, the interface board 66 and the ground board 1000 are connected by the wiring 2003 (earth board harness), and the ground board 1000 and the game are connected by the wiring 2001 (external connection ground). It is connected to the outside of the aircraft (installed island). Further, the card unit 50 is connected to a power outlet outside the gaming machine by a wiring 2000 (external connection ground) different from the wirings 2002 and 2003. That is, the card unit 50 is grounded by the wiring 2000 built in the cord of the power outlet. As described above, since the card unit 50 is grounded by the route of the wiring 2000 different from the route of the wirings 2002, 2003, and 2001, the card unit 50 and the ground substrate 1000 are not connected by the wiring 2002 or 2003. Even in the case where the wiring 2002 or 2003 is disconnected, the card unit 50 can be grounded. Further, even when the ground board 1000 and the outside of the gaming machine are not connected by the wiring 2001 (including the case where the wiring 2001 is disconnected), the card unit 50 can be grounded, and the gaming machine body can also be connected to the wiring 2004, 2003. , 2002, 2000 can be grounded. In the configuration shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the surge absorber 1100 is disposed on the wiring 1002 on the ground substrate 1000. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the ground wire of the card unit 50 from the gaming machine body. As long as it is on the path up to (on the wiring 2004 in FIG. 25), it may be arranged at any location.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the metal fitting 410 and the earth substrate 1000 are connected by the wiring 2004. However, instead of the metal fitting 410, the storage tank 38 and the earth substrate 1000 may be connected by the wiring 2004. Good. In this case, since the rapid discharge can be avoided by the resistance of the carbon resin of the storage tank 38, it is preferable as the connection of the ground wiring.

  Next, the configuration of the power supply substrate 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit configuration in the power supply board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 26, the power supply voltage AC24V is input to the connector CN1 of the power supply board 910. As shown in FIG. 26, a fuse 911 is connected in series to the other terminal of connector CN1 (“2” of connector CN1 shown in FIG. 23). In addition, a varistor 912, a capacitor 913, and a transformer 916 are sequentially connected between both terminals of the connector CN1. Two power thermistors 914 and 915 are connected in parallel between the other terminal side of the capacitor 913 and the other terminal side of the transformer 916.

  As described above, the varistor 912 is an element that is high resistance and does not flow current in a normal state (when the voltage is below a certain voltage), but starts to flow suddenly when a voltage exceeding a certain voltage is applied. . The power thermistors 914 and 915 are elements whose resistance values change with temperature, and the resistance decreases as the temperature increases.

  Conventionally, only the fuse 911 is provided without providing a circuit including the varistor 912, the capacitor 913, and the power thermistors 914 and 915. However, if the voltage input from the connector CN1 is too high (for example, when an AC 100V power supply is accidentally connected), an excessive current flows in the circuit in the power supply board 910 before the fuse 911 is burned out. Therefore, there is a problem that the circuit element is broken. Therefore, in this embodiment, a circuit including a varistor 912, a capacitor 913, and a power thermistor 914, 915 is provided so that the fuse 911 is surely blown when the voltage input from the connector CN1 is too high. Specifically, since the power thermistors 914 and 915 do not flow current unless the temperature rises, the power thermistors 914 and 915 do not generate heat even when a power supply voltage of AC 100V is suddenly input, and the current flows to the transformer 916 side. Not flowing. When the power supply voltage reaches a certain voltage value, the varistor 912 conducts and starts to flow current. As a result, the fuse 911 is burned out and the input of the power supply voltage from the connector CN1 is stopped. By having such a circuit configuration, even if a 100V power supply is mistakenly connected to the connector CN1 (mainly at a cold start when a wiring connection error occurs when installing a gaming machine), it is reliable. In addition, it is possible to prevent an excessive current from flowing to the elements of the internal circuit of the power supply substrate 910, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the power supply circuit from being destroyed.

  The power supply circuit mounted on the power supply board 910 shown in FIG. 26 generates a voltage used by each board and mechanism component in the gaming machine. In this example, AC24V, VSL (DC + 30V), VDD (DC + 12V), and VCC (DC + 5V) are generated. The power supply circuit is divided into a plurality of systems in order to obtain a plurality of types of power supply voltages.

  First, the AC power supply (AC24V) from the connector CN1 is input to the input side (primary side) of the transformer 916. The transformer 916 is for electrically insulating the AC power supply (AC24V) and the power supply substrate 910, and its output voltage is also AC24V. The transformer 916 and the bridge circuit 931 constitute a bridge full-wave rectifier circuit, and the transformer 916 and the bridge circuit 932 constitute a different-system bridge full-wave rectifier circuit. When the bridge full-wave rectifier circuit operates, a pair of opposing diodes in the bridge circuits 931 and 932 conducts in the positive half cycle, while another pair of opposing diodes in the bridge circuits 931 and 932 in the negative half cycle. Conduct. As a result, the AC waveform of the power supply is converted into a full-wave rectified waveform.

  Next, three systems of circuits 941, 942, and 943 are provided at the subsequent stage (downstream side) of the bridge circuit 931. These circuits 941, 942, and 943 are respectively a smoothing circuit composed of a smoothing capacitor (electrolytic capacitor) or the like provided at the front stage (upstream side), and a switching regulator as a constant voltage circuit provided at the rear stage (downstream side). And. The output waveform of the bridge full-wave rectifier circuit is smoothed by the smoothing circuit (pulsation is removed), and the smoothed waveform is stabilized at a constant voltage by the switching regulator.

  The voltage branched before the circuit 941 (the output voltage of the bridge circuit 931) is output to the VSL terminals (“2A” and “2B”) of the connector CN5 via the fuse 951. The output voltage from the circuit 941 is output to the VDD terminal (“2”) of the connector CN4 via the fuse 952. The output voltage from the circuit 942 is output to the VDD terminals (“3A” and “3B”) of the connector CN5 via the fuse 953. The output voltage from the circuit 943 is output via the fuse 954 to the VCC terminal (“3”) of the connector CN4 and the VCC terminal (“4A” “4B”) of the connector CN5.

  Further, two systems of circuits 944 and 945 are provided at the subsequent stage (downstream side) of the bridge circuit 932. Each of these circuits 944 and 945 includes a smoothing circuit including a smoothing capacitor (electrolytic capacitor) provided in the front stage (upstream side) and a switching regulator as a constant voltage circuit provided in the rear stage (downstream side). I have. The output waveform of the bridge full-wave rectifier circuit is smoothed by the smoothing circuit (pulsation is removed), and the smoothed waveform is stabilized at a constant voltage by the switching regulator.

  The voltage branched before the bridge circuit 932 (the output voltage of the transformer 916) is output as it is to the AC24V terminal ("2" "3") of the connector CN2. The voltage branched before the circuit 944 (the output voltage of the bridge circuit 932) is output to the VSL terminal (“5”) of the connector CN2 via the fuse 955, and also to the VSL terminal (“5”) of the connector CN3 via the fuse 956. “2A” and “2B”). The output voltage from the circuit 944 is output to the VDD terminal (“6”) of the connector CN2 via the fuse 957, and is output to the VDD terminal (“3A” “3B”) of the connector CN3 via the fuse 958. . The output voltage from the circuit 945 is output to the VCC terminal (“7”) of the connector CN2 via the fuse 959, and is output to the VCC terminal (“4A” “4B”) of the connector CN3 via the fuse 960. .

  A capacitor 922 serving as a memory holding means for holding the stored contents in the backup power supply (VBB), that is, the backup RAM (RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560) drives DC + 5V (VCC), that is, an IC on each board. It is charged from the power line. The output voltage across capacitor 922 is output to the VBB terminal (“5A”) of connector CN3. Further, a backflow preventing diode 923 is inserted between the +5 V line and the backup +5 V (VBB) line. The reference potentials are GND terminals (“1” and “4”) of the connector CN4, GND terminals of the connector CN5 (“1A”, “1B”, “5A” and “5B”), and GND terminals (“1” and “4” of the connector CN2). "8") and the GND terminal ("1A" "1B" "6A" "6B") of the connector CN3. Further, the connector CN3 is provided with a terminal (“5B”) connected to the clear switch 921. When the clear switch 921 is not pressed, a high level signal is output, and when the clear switch 921 is pressed, a low level signal is output.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the connector CN2 is a connector for supplying power to the payout control board 37, the connector CN3 is a connector for supplying power to the main board 31, and the connector CN4 is The connector CN5 is a connector for supplying power to the frame serial relay board, and the connector CN5 is a connector for supplying power to the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board-side IC board 601, and the frame-side IC boards 602, 603, 604, and 605. The effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606 together with serial data as a control signal. In addition, an input capture signal for causing the input ICs 620 and 621 to latch the input signal is output to the relay board 606.

  The relay board 606 supplies the serial data and the clock signal input from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC board 601. And each serial-parallel conversion IC616-619 converts the input serial data into parallel data, and each lamp 125a-125f, 126a-126f, 127a-127c provided in the game board 6, and each movable member The motors 151a to 151c are supplied.

  The relay board 607 is connected to the relay board 606 through a single bus-type wiring route. The serial data line 300 and the clock signal line 301 connected to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 are connected on the board side IC substrate 601 in a bus form.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the ID of IC 616 is 06, the ID of IC 617 is 07, the ID of IC 618 is 08, and the ID of IC 619 is 09.

  In addition, an input IC 621 for inputting a detection signal of a position sensor of each movable member provided on the game board 6 is mounted on the board side IC board 601. In this embodiment, the input IC 621 and the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 include an input signal line 302, a clock signal line 301, and an input capture signal line 303 via a relay board 606. It is connected. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 621 via the relay board 606 at a predetermined timing. Then, the input IC 621 latches the detection signal of each position sensor based on the input fetch signal (latch signal) and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 606. In this case, the input IC 621 converts the detection signal input in parallel from each position sensor into serial data and outputs it. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 621 is 11, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the serial data and clock signal input to the relay board 607 are supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 605, respectively. And each serial-parallel conversion IC611-615 converts the input serial data into parallel data, and each lamp 281a-281l, 282a-282e, 283a-283e, 51a, 51b, 82a provided in the game frame 11 is provided. To 82d and 83.

  The serial data lines and clock signal lines connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 are connected in a bus form on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 of the frame-side IC board 604 is inputted, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 and the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 and the serial-parallel of the frame-side IC board 602 are inputted. The signals are input in the order of the parallel conversion IC 612, and further input from the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 of the frame side IC substrate 603. The serial data line and the clock signal line connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 are directly connected from the relay board 607.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 615 mounted on each frame side IC substrate 602 to 605 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the ID of the IC 611 is 01, the ID of the IC 612 is 02, the ID of the IC 613 is 03, the ID of the IC 614 is 04, and the ID of the IC 615 is 05 It is.

  In addition, an input IC 620 for inputting detection signals of the operation buttons 81 a to 81 e provided on the game frame 11 is mounted on the frame side IC board 605. In this embodiment, an input signal line, a clock signal line, and an input capture signal line are connected to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605 and the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. Has been. The production control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 620 via the relay boards 606 and 607 at a predetermined timing. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs the input capture signal to the input IC 620 at a timing different from the timing of outputting the input capture signal to the input IC 621. Then, the input IC 620 latches the detection signals from the operation buttons 81a to 81e based on the input capture signal (latch signal), and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. In this case, the input IC 620 converts detection signals input in parallel from the operation buttons 81a to 81e into serial data and outputs the serial data. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 620 is 10 as shown in FIG.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the panel-side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame-side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected via one line of wiring. . Specifically, the connection through one system wiring means that the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus type, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 are connected in a bus type or a daisy chain type. It is that. That is, being connected through one system of wiring means that the signal output from the signal output side (in this example, the production control board 80) is transmitted from each board (for example, the relay boards 606 and 607) or each IC ( For example, it is connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619) so as to be transmitted from the upstream side to the downstream side of the signal flow. Further, it means that the signal is not transmitted by any one of a plurality of independent systems to each board (for example, relay boards 606 and 607) and each IC (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619). To do. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 are connected in a bus type. As described above, in this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided. The connectors 156a to 156h and 157a to 157e are connected via the relay boards 606 and 607 via one line of wiring. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed simply by attaching and detaching the connector, and the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be attached and detached more easily.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input ICs 620 and 621. The common clock signal is input from the production control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the wiring of the clock signal to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and the wiring of the clock signal to the input ICs 620 and 621 can be shared, and communication between the effect control means and the board-side IC 601 board, Communication between the effect control means and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 can be realized using one channel, respectively, and the number of wirings can be reduced. Also, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input ICs 620 and 621 can be easily synchronized. The number of clock signal wirings can also be reduced.

  In this embodiment, addresses are assigned in advance to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619. When the production control microcomputer 100 outputs the control signal converted into serial data, it adds an address to the serial data and outputs it. When each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619 inputs serial data, it checks whether the address added to the input serial data matches its own address, and if it matches, converts it to parallel data. Supply (ie, output) each lamp. If the addresses do not match, supply to each lamp is not performed.

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of addresses given to the respective serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 in a predetermined address storage area previously provided in the RAM or ROM. Yes.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, an address 01 is assigned to the IC 611, and an address is assigned to the IC 612. 02 is given, address 03 is given to IC613, address 04 is given to IC614, and address 05 is given to IC615. Further, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the address 006 is assigned to the IC 616, the address 07 is given to the IC 617, the address 08 is given to the IC 618, and the IC 619 is given to the IC 619. Address 09 is given.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 may be given the same ID as the unique ID of the IC as an address, and an address (specifically, an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC). , Code data such as JIS codes representing characters and symbols may be used as addresses).

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is 01 converts the serial data into parallel data, and converts the top frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the top frame lamps 281a to 281l). 6 LEDs (281a to 281f). The serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is 02 converts serial data into parallel data, and the top frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the other six LEDs (281 g to 281 l) of the top frame lamps 281a to 281l). ). Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 whose address is 03 converts the serial data into parallel data, and converts it into a right frame lamp and a right award ball lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, six LEDs (283a to 283e, 51b)). Supply. Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is 04 converts the serial data into parallel data, and turns it into a left frame lamp and a left award ball lamp (in this example, six LEDs (282a to 282e, 51a)) of the game frame 11. Supply.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is 05 converts the serial data into parallel data, and turns it into a plate lamp (in this example, four LEDs (82a to 82d)) provided on the hitting ball supply tray 3 of the game frame 11. At the same time, it is supplied to an operation button lamp 83 (one lamp in this example) provided on the operation buttons 81a to 81e.

  In addition, the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is 06 converts serial data into parallel data, and each movable member provided in the game board 6 (in this example, a role imitating the shape of a beam, a truck, and a skeleton) ) (In this example, three motors (151a, 152a, 153a) are supplied in the reverse direction). The serial-parallel conversion IC 617 whose address is 07 converts the serial data into parallel data, and each lamp of the decorative structure (center decoration) provided in the center of the game board 6 (in this example, six LEDs (125a To 125 f)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 618 whose address is 08 converts the serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to each stage lamp (in this example, 6 LEDs (126a to 126f)) provided around the variable display device 9. To do. The serial-parallel conversion IC 619 whose address is 09 converts serial data into parallel data, and a lamp (three LEDs (127a to 127c in this example)) provided around the movable member (the skeleton 153 in this example). To supply.

  FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing a configuration of each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619. As illustrated in FIG. 30, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 include a data latch unit 651, a shift register 652, a header / address detection unit 653, a data buffer 655, and a sync driver 656.

  The data latch unit 651 includes, for example, a latch circuit. When serial data is input, the data latch unit 651 latches the input data bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse and outputs the latched data to the shift register 652. The shift register 652 sequentially stores data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 651. The shift register 652 shifts stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal. By repeatedly shifting the stored data bit by bit in this way, the data finally input as serial data (that is, in the serial signal system) is stored in the shift register 652.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of serial data output from the production control microcomputer 100. FIG. FIG. 31A shows a data format of serial data output as lamp lighting data for individually lighting or extinguishing the LEDs constituting each lamp provided in the game board 6 or the game frame 11. FIG. 31B shows a serial data format that is output as a reset command for resetting the LEDs constituting the respective lamps provided in the game board 6 and the game frame 11 to turn them off.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the lamp lighting data is composed of 28 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit addresses, 8-bit data, and end bits (E). .

  The header data represents the beginning of the data, and is 1FF (H) in this example. (H) indicates a hexadecimal number. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the address and between the address and the data. The address is the address of the data-output destination serial-parallel conversion IC. An ID that is a unique serial number of each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 619 may be used as the address.

  The data (8 bits) is for controlling the lighting state of the LEDs constituting each lamp. For example, the data (8 bits) includes a logical value 1 as a bit corresponding to the LED constituting the lamp to be lit, A logical value 0 is included as a bit corresponding to the LED constituting the lamp. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and is a logical value 0 in this example.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the reset command is composed of 19 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit reset data, and end bits (E).

  The header data represents the beginning of the data, and is 1FF (H) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the reset data. The reset data is for resetting the lighting states of the LEDs constituting each lamp so that all the LEDs are extinguished. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and is a logical value 0 in this example.

  In this embodiment, the lamp lighting data shown in FIG. 31A or the reset command shown in FIG. 31B is input, and the shift register 652 is repeatedly shifted bit by bit at the rising edge of the clock signal pulse. Will be stored.

  The header / address detector 653 detects the header and address from the data stored in the shift register 652. First, the header / address detection unit 653 constantly detects data from the shift register 652, and confirms whether or not the content of the detected data matches 1FF (H) corresponding to the header data. If it matches with the header data (1FF (H)), it is determined that the position matching the header data is the head of the data, and it is determined that one set of lamp lighting data or reset command is stored in the shift register 652. Next, the header / address detection unit 653 detects the 11th to 18th bits of data from the head corresponding to the address from the shift register 652, and whether or not it matches the address previously given to the serial-parallel conversion IC. To check. The board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided with, for example, address storage registers 654 that store addresses of serial-parallel conversion ICs to be mounted. The header / address detector 653 may check whether the address detected from the shift register 652 matches the address stored in the address storage register 654 in advance. If the addresses match, the header / address detection 653 determines that data destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC has been input, and outputs an input capture signal (latch signal) to the data buffer 655. If the addresses do not match, the header / address detection 653 does not output the input capture signal to the data buffer 655. That is, in this case, since the data is not addressed to the serial-parallel conversion IC, the data stored in the shift register 652 is discarded without being output to the data buffer 655.

  FIG. 30 shows a case where an address storage register 654 is provided in advance on the board side IC board 601 and each of the frame side IC boards 602 to 605, but instead of the address storage register 654, a serial- An address is provided from an external hardware circuit (for example, a circuit mounted on the effect control board 80) via an address terminal (8 terminals (corresponding to each bit of an 8-bit address)) provided in the parallel conversion IC. May be input. An address may be input to the serial-parallel conversion IC by controlling the input of each address terminal to “H” (high level) or “L” (low level) from the external hardware circuit side. . In this case, for example, the external hardware circuit sets the input to the terminal to “H” by applying a voltage to the terminal corresponding to any bit of the address, or the input to the terminal by switching to the ground. Control to be “L”.

  The data buffer 655 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When an input capture signal is input from the header / address detector 653, the data of the 20th to 27th bits from the head corresponding to the data portion is captured from the shift register 652. Latch with. The data buffer 655 supplies (that is, outputs) the captured data as parallel data (Q0 to Q7) to the LEDs constituting each lamp.

  If the data stored in the shift register 652 is a reset command, the 11th to 18th bits from the beginning all store data having a logical value of 1. In this case, the data buffer 655 determines that a reset command has been input when all data having a logical value of 1 is fetched, and the LEDs constituting all the lamps are reset and turned off.

  The sync driver 656 inverts and outputs the logical value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 based on a predetermined logic inversion setting signal, or outputs it as it is. For example, when the predetermined logic inversion setting signal is “H”, it turns on when the bit value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 is 1 (that is, the corresponding bit value of the lamp lighting data is 1). And an ON signal is output to the LEDs constituting each lamp. In this embodiment, the set value of the logic inversion setting signal is set in advance in the registers provided on the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602-605. It is assumed that an ON signal is output to the LEDs constituting each lamp in accordance with a preset setting value, and the LEDs constituting each lamp are turned on.

  FIG. 32 is a timing diagram showing an example of input timing of serial data and clock signals to the serial-parallel conversion IC and output timing of parallel data. In addition, FIG. 32 demonstrates the case where lamp lighting data is input by a serial signal system. As shown in FIG. 32, serial data is input to the shift register 652 of the serial-parallel conversion IC in units of 1 bit in the order of header data, mark bits, addresses, mark bits, data, and end bits. The series of data is set as one set. The header / address detection unit 653 does not detect header data until one set of serial data (in this example, lamp lighting data) has been input, so the output of the data buffer 655 does not change. Therefore, the lighting pattern based on the serial data received last time is output from the serial-parallel conversion IC as it is by the parallel signal method (method for sending data at a time through a plurality of signal lines).

  When all sets of serial data have been input, the data portion from the data stored in the shift register 652 is latched in the data buffer 655, and a lighting pattern based on the newly received serial data is output in a parallel signal system. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, among the parallel data output from the serial-parallel conversion IC, Q0 and Q4 are the rising timing of the pulse of the next clock signal after completion of the serial data input. Immediately, the data is switched to new lighting pattern data. Q1 and Q5 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of one clock from Q0 and Q4. Q2 and Q6 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of two clocks from Q0 and Q4. Further, Q3 and Q7 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of three clocks from Q0 and Q4.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (in this embodiment, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14A.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number) to 0, but it is set to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop An initial value is set to a flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state.

  Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command for initializing a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the initialization control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the variable display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the stop period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the stop period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the variable display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 inputs data (input data) of bits 0 to 6 (see FIG. 21) of the input port 1 (step S14A), and an input port data designation command (see FIG. 39) in which the input data is set to the second byte. ) Is transmitted to the effect control board (step S14B). It should be noted that immediately after the power supply to the gaming machine is started, if an abnormality occurs in which the clock signal is not supplied to the random number circuit 503, the data of bit 6 of the input port 1 is “0”. . Further, the CPU 56 stores the input data in the input port 1 buffer that is an area of the RAM 55 (step S14C).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S14D). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R (big hit determination random number).

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 transmits the input data of bits 0 to 6 of the input port 1 as an input port data designation command to the effect control board at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (steps S14A to 14C). In the first timer interrupt process, the random error signal bit of the input data of bits 0 to 6 of the input port 1 is in the OFF state (the state where there is no random error, i.e., the process of steps S14A to 14C is not performed. In the off state, an input port data designation command may be transmitted. In that case, the rendering control CPU 101 of the rendering control microcomputer 100 generates a random number error when the input port data designation command cannot be received within a predetermined time after the power supply is started and the control can be performed. It is determined that When such control is performed, the control burden is reduced as compared with the case where the CPU 56 checks whether or not a random number error has occurred within a predetermined time.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34.

  In addition, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the big winning opening at a time other than the regular time, or has detected that the game ball has won the second start winning opening at a time other than the regular time. In this case, a process for notifying the abnormal winning is performed (step S23A: abnormal winning notifying process).

  The CPU 56 transmits the input data of bits 0 to 6 of the input port 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the input data of bits 0 to 6 (see FIG. 21) of the input port 1 changes. Input port data confirmation processing is executed (step S23B).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining jackpot symbols used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine type of jackpot (for determining jackpot type)
(2) Random 2: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (for determining off symbol)
(3) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination) (4) Random 4: Determine whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determination per ordinary symbol)
(5) Random 5: Random 4 initial value is determined (for determining random 4 initial value)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 35, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number in (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol in (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may make it use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(5). In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a random number generated by hardware (random number circuit 503) provided outside the game control microcomputer 560, but the big hit determination random number is used as the big hit determination random number. Software random numbers generated by the computer 560 based on the program may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command or the like related to display control of decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol command control processing: step S29). In this embodiment, in step S29, the game control microcomputer 560 causes the MODE data or EXT data (MODE data to which the addresses of the destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 are added) to constitute the effect control command. Alternatively, transmission control is performed by adding header data, mark bits, and end bits to (EXT data). The effect control command is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and transmitted to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  Further, the CPU 56, for example, outputs a signal to the hall computer (specifically, a symbol determination frequency signal, a start port 1 signal, a start port 2 signal, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal output from the output ports 2 and 3). , A time reduction signal, a probability variation signal, a door open (negative) signal, a door open (positive) signal, a prize ball information signal) are output (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, payout control is performed in response to detection of a winning based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control signal (payout command signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 according to the payout command signal.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  Next, the difference between the big hit (15 round big hit), the sudden probability variation big hit, and the small hit will be described.

  When the special symbol and the decorative symbol stop symbol become a probable variation (excluding a sudden probabilistic variation described later) or a non-probable variation in the jackpot symbol, a big hit gaming state (probable big hit or non-probable big hit (usually also called big hit)) Migrate to That is, the special variable prize-winning device is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or the non-probability variation symbol, the jackpot gaming state is continued for 15 rounds. The

  In addition, when the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol become a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (to be recognized by the player as if the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the certain probability variation state) Hereafter, it suddenly shifts to probable big hit.) In the case of sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning device is opened twice for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, it is one round from when the special variable winning device is opened until it is closed, and the gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. It should be noted that, in the sudden odds big win, the period during which the special variable winning device is opened is short, and ten game balls do not win while the special variable winning device is opened. Need not be defined as one round. When a sudden odd jackpot occurs, unlike in the case of 15 round jackpots, the effects of each round do not proceed in sequence on the variable display device 9, but the game state suddenly shifts to the probable state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  In addition, when the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol become a small hit symbol, the game shifts to a small hit game state in which the game value (for example, the number of appearances) given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. That is, it shifts to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, the player expects the occurrence of a probable big hit suddenly rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display period (variable display time) is the same.

  Next, the type of gaming state and the transition of gaming state in this embodiment will be described.

  The probability variation state (probability variation state) refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player who has a higher probability of making a big hit (that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol) than the normal gaming state and the short-time state.

  Also, the short time state (time shortening state) means that the special symbol variable display time (variation time) of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display device 9 is the normal gaming state and the probability variation state (except the probability variation time short state). It means a gaming state that is shortened. By shortening the variable display time in this way, the variable display of symbols is frequently executed, and the probability of jackpot per unit time is improved, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is higher than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state (excluding the probability variation time short state), and the opening time and the release time in the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. One or both of the number of times is increased more than the normal game state and the probability change state (except for the probability change time short state), which is a more advantageous state for the player. Further, in the short time state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 10 is shorter than the normal game state and the probable change state (excluding the probable change short time state), which is further advantageous for the player. It becomes a state. In addition, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is improved, and one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is reduced. A normal state other than the high base state is called a low base state.

  The probability change short state means a game state that is a probability change state and a time short state. The probabilistic short time state is a very advantageous state for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state transitions as follows.

(1) When the normal game state and the short-time state, the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is changed from the normal game state and the short-time state to the probability change time-short state . As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(2) When the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability variation state, it will shift to the probability variation time short state, When the gaming state is the short state at the time of probability change, the short state at the time of probability change is maintained without changing. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(3) When the normal game state and the short-time state suddenly become a big hit with a probable change symbol, and when the big hit game is completed, the game state is shifted from the normal game state and the short-time state to a positive change state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state.

(4) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state suddenly hit a big win with the probability change symbol, and when the big hit game is finished, if the game state is the probability change state, the probability change state is continued without changing, and the game state is definitely changed. When it is in the short-time state, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. In addition, after the sudden probability big hit game is ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the probability variation state.

(5) In the normal game state and the short-time state, a big hit is made with a non-probable variation pattern, and when the big-hit game ends, the time-short state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state to the short-time state is made a predetermined number of times of variation, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(6) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state, a big hit is made with a non-probability variation symbol, and when the big hit game is ended, the time is controlled to a short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit ends. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state and the probability variation short time state to the short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(7) In the normal gaming state and the probability changing state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hitting game ends, the normal gaming state and the probability changing state are continued without changing. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

(8) When the time-short state and the probability change time short state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the time-short state and the probability change time short state are continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the outlier symbol of both symbols, the probability variation symbol, the non-probability variation symbol, the sudden probability variation symbol, and the small hit symbol symbol) will be described.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display 8 are “0” to “9”. Among these, “0” to “3”, “8”, “9” are outliers, “7” is a probability variable symbol, “6” is a non-probability variable symbol, and “5” is a sudden probability variable symbol. “4” is a small hit symbol.

  The left, middle and right decorative symbols variably displayed on the variable display device 9 are “0” to “9”, respectively. Here, the off-decoration symbol is a symbol in which the left, middle, and right ornament symbols are not aligned in the same symbol (for example, “358” or the like: excluding a sudden probability variation symbol and a small hit symbol described later). . Note that although the left and right decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern (although it is a reach), the state in which only the decorative symbols in the middle are not aligned is also an outlier.

  The big hit symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol in a state in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle and right are aligned in the same symbol. Specifically, “000”, “111”, “222”, “333”, “444”, “555”, “666”, “777”, “888”, “999”. Among these, the symbols (“111”, “333”, “555”, “777”, “999”) in a state of being arranged in an odd number of decorative symbols are probability variation symbols, and the symbols in a state of being arranged in an even number of decorative symbols (“000”, “222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) are non-probable variables.

  The suddenly probabilistic symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol in a state in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle and right become continuous numbers. Specifically, they are “123”, “234”, “345”, “456”, “567”, “678”, “789”. The sudden probability variation symbol is a kind of jackpot symbol, but it is desirable that the sudden probability variation symbol does not easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot symbol in order to make it appear that it has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. For this reason, as described above, the suddenly probable symbols are different from the jackpot symbols. The above-mentioned symbol is an example of a suddenly probabilistic symbol. For example, when the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different odd numbers, such as “135” and “357”, the suddenly probable symbol may be used.

  The small hit symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol in a state in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle and right become continuous numbers. That is, they are the same symbols (“123”, “234”, “345”, “456”, “567”, “678”, “789”) as the suddenly probable symbols of the decorative symbols. Thus, by making the small symbol of the decorative symbol the same as the symbol of the sudden probability variation, the player cannot recognize whether the sudden sudden variation big hit or the small bonus has occurred from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. . Also, as will be described later, since the same special performance is executed in the sudden change big hit state and the small hit state suddenly, the player suddenly had a probable big hit from the contents of the production or a small hit occurred It will not be possible to recognize. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state by the player can be maintained after the sudden probability big hit or small hit ends. As for the special symbols, the sudden probability variation symbol is “5” and the small hit symbol is “4”, which are different symbols.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. In FIG. 36, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command having a two-byte structure. “Time” indicates the variation time of the special symbol (variable display period of identification information).

  In this example, each variation pattern of the special symbol includes a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “out-of-line” (a variation pattern dedicated to loss), and a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (at the time of the variable stop before the big hit) When the stop symbol is “non-probable variable” or “probable variable”, the fluctuation pattern (normal big hit / probable big hit combined fluctuation pattern) and the decorative symbol stop symbol (stop symbol at the time of variable stop before big hit) Variation pattern when “probability variation” (variation pattern dedicated to probability variation big hit) and variation pattern when decoration symbol stop symbol (stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop before big hit) becomes “non-probability variation” (normal) A variation pattern dedicated to big hits), a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is "Suddenly Probable Change", and a stop pattern of the decorative symbol is "Small Ri are distinguished in the variation pattern when the symbol "(variation pattern of Koatari only).

  The fluctuation pattern dedicated to outliers is the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation without reach in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation in short time without the reach in the short-time state (including the short state at the time of probability change), and normal reach It is divided into a fluctuation pattern with (simple reach mode), a fluctuation pattern with long reach, a fluctuation pattern with super reach A, a fluctuation pattern with super reach B, and a fluctuation pattern with super reach C. Yes.

  The normal big hit / probable big hit variation pattern is a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with long reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, and a variation with super reach C. It is divided into patterns.

  The fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probable big hit is only the fluctuation pattern with super reach D. Usually, the only variation pattern dedicated to jackpot is the variation pattern with super reach E.

  The variation pattern dedicated to the sudden probability variation big hit is only the variation pattern of the special variation for sudden probability variation. The variation pattern dedicated to small hits is only the variation pattern of special variation for small hits.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. In this embodiment, the effect control command is converted from parallel data to serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of the effect control command transmitted by the serial signal method. As shown in FIG. 37, when transmitting the effect control command, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first adds header data and mark bits to MODE data (MODE data to which an address is added), Transmission control is performed by adding an end bit. Then, the serial output circuit 78 converts the MODE data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs transmission control by adding header data, mark bits, and end bits to EXT data (EXT data with an address added). Then, the serial output circuit 78 converts the EXT data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 38, commands 8000 (H) to 800F (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8001 (H) to 800F (H), the variable display device 9 controls the variable display device 9 to start variable display of the decorative symbols. In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are synchronized (the variable display start time and the variable display end time are the same), so the decorative pattern variation pattern (variation time) Determining also means determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol.

  Commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands for designating the contents of the stop symbols (display results) of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as symbol information designation commands.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (outgoing designation command) for designating that the stop symbol (display result) of the special symbol is determined as the offcoming symbol. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been decided as a non-probable variation symbol (that is, a non-probability variation big hit (also referred to as a normal big hit)). ).

  The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (designated to specify that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol (that is, a probable variation big hit is determined), and that it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts. 1 specified command per probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit 2 designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided as the probability varying symbol and that it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit game. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variable symbol and that it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is finished (during the ending effect) 3 designation command).

  Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command (suddenly probable big hit designation command) for designating that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been suddenly determined to be a probable change symbol (that is, that it has been determined to be suddenly probable big hit). The command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command (small hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as the small hit symbol (that is, determined as the small hit symbol).

  Here, the “re-lottery effect” refers to an effect that makes it appear that the jackpot symbol is re-lotted and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. Specifically, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot symbol (non-probability variable symbol or probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9, the left, right and right decorative symbols are the same in the variable display device 9. This is an effect of deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) after stopping and displaying the non-probability variation symbol and then changing the non-probability variation symbol again. The re-lottery effect includes a case where a non-probable variable symbol is promoted to a probable variable symbol (when a non-probable variable symbol is displayed after being stopped), and a case where a non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to a probable variable symbol (non-probable variable symbol However, in this embodiment, only the case where the non-probability variable symbol is promoted to the probable variation symbol is shown. Therefore, the re-lottery effect may be referred to as “promotion effect” or “rising effect”.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decoration symbol stop designation command, symbol confirmation designation command) for designating stop of variable display (fluctuation) of decoration symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are effect control commands (background designation commands) for designating background display according to the gaming state in the variable display device 9. Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the normal gaming state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the probability variation state (high probability state). The command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the time-short state. The command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the chance mode state. The chance mode is an effect mode in which an expectation for the transition to the probability change state is given after the sudden probability big hit and the small hit end.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating display during the customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, commands A000 (H) to A004 (H) are effect control commands (fanfare designation commands) for designating that a big hit game is started. Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 1 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is determined. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 2 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the big hit game is started. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 3 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that a probability variation big hit is determined and a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 4 designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot when it is determined that a probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery is to be executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect) It is. Command A004 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 5 designation command) that designates the start of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in the 15 round jackpot game. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the 15 round big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set.

  Commands A301 (H) to A305 (H) are effect control commands (ending designation commands) that designate the end of the big hit game. The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (ending 1 designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game (displaying that the game will shift to the short time state after the jackpot game is finished). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the jackpot game is started. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command (ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the big hit when the probability variation big hit is determined and it is determined to execute the re-lottery during the big hit game. Command A304 (H) is an effect control command (ending 4 designation command) that is promoted to a probable variation symbol in the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (during the ending effect) and designates that it will be a promising big hit. Command A 305 (H) is an effect control command (ending 5 designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  Command A4XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in a two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). Command A5XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the two round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). In “XX”, the number of rounds is set.

  Command A600 (H) is an effect control command (small hit fanfare designation command) that designates that a small hit game is started.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command) for designating the number of starting winning memories shown by XX.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning.

  Command FFYY (H) is an effect control command (input port data designation command) indicating input data of input port 1. YY indicates input data of the input port 1.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the contents shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. Accordingly, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. It should be noted that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls that is a big hit on the variable display device 9, an effect control command for designating the count number of the count switch 23 is also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of EXT data (YY portion) of the command FFYY (H) (input port data designation command). The bit assignment of EXT data is the same as the bit assignment of input port 1 shown in FIG. That is, a random number error designation bit corresponding to the random number error signal is assigned to bit 6 (D6). Bit 5 (D5) is assigned a door opening 2 error designation bit corresponding to the door opening 2 signal. Bit 4 (D4) is assigned a door opening 1 error designation bit corresponding to the door opening 1 signal. A payout error designation bit corresponding to the payout error signal is assigned to bit 3 (D3). Bit 2 (D2) is assigned a ball-out error designation bit corresponding to the ball-out error signal. Bit 1 (D1) is assigned a full tank error designation bit corresponding to the full tank error signal. A prize ball count designation bit corresponding to the prize ball count signal is assigned to bit 0 (D0).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, an abnormal winning notification designation command (D000 (H)) for designating that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred, The command is different from the input port data designation command (FFYY (H)). However, in the example shown in FIG. 40, since bit 7 of the EXT data of the input port data designation command is not used, information indicating that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening etc. has occurred is used for the effect control. It can be used when transmitting to the microcomputer 100.

  41 and 42 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening is executed.

  When performing the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first start port switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 13 provided in the game board 6. If it is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 has occurred (step S311), the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) becomes the upper limit value (held memory number = 4). It is confirmed whether it has reached (step S312).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit value (N in step S312), the game control microcomputer 560 uses software random numbers (counter values for generating jackpot type determination random numbers, etc.) and random R ( The big hit determination random number) is extracted, and a process of storing them in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved memory number counter as the extracted random number value is executed (step S313). In step S313, the game control microcomputer 560 extracts random numbers 1 to 3 as software random numbers, and extracts random R by reading the count value of the random number circuit 503 as hardware random numbers. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is secured. In addition, a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S314). Although not shown in FIG. 41, when the value of the pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, the start prize memory designation command (the start prize memory designation command at this time is the start prize memory number due to the occurrence of the start prize). Is a command indicating that +1 has been added).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560, if the second start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on, that is, If a start winning that causes the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 has occurred (step S315), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (step S316).

  Here, the value of the normal symbol process flag being 3 means that, as will be described later, the normal electric accessory actuating process (FIG. 64) in the normal symbol process (step S28) is executed, and the variable winning ball apparatus ( This means that the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory) 15 is being performed. When the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is being performed (Y in step S316), winning in the second start winning opening 14 may occur, so the processing in steps S317 to S319 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3, that is, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not being opened / closed, the fact that the second starter switch 14a is turned on is an illegal action (for example, normal Although the symbol is not a winning symbol, there is a high possibility that an abnormal winning based on the act of opening the variable winning ball device 15 and winning the game ball to the second start winning port 14) has occurred. Therefore, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S316), the second start winning itself is invalidated without executing the processes in steps S317 to S319. Thereby, even if it is a case where the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 14 was generated by the fraudulent act, it can be surely prevented that the big hit is generated based on the winning.

  The game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag, but actually opens the variable winning ball apparatus 15. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state when the variable winning ball device 15 repeats the opening / closing operation based on the opening pattern corresponding to the gaming state in the normal electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. ), It may be configured not to execute the prize ball payout based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. However, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. For example, when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened or closed a plurality of times (twice in the embodiment) as in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 15 is actually opened. If it is determined whether or not the control is performed and it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, the processing becomes complicated. However, the processing can be simplified by determining based on the normal symbol process flag.

  When it is determined in step S316 that the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (Y in step S316), the gaming control microcomputer 560 sets the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) to the upper limit value (reserved memory number). = 4) is confirmed (step S317).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit (N in step S317), the game control microcomputer 560 uses software random numbers (counter values for generating big hit type determination random numbers, etc.) and random R ( The big hit determination random number) is extracted, and a process of storing them in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved memory number counter as the extracted random number value is executed (step S318). Also in step S318, the game control microcomputer 560 extracts random numbers 1 to 3 as software random numbers, and also extracts random R by reading the count value of the random number circuit 503 as hardware random numbers.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S319). At this time as well, a start winning memory designation command (a start winning memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the number of start winning memories is incremented by one due to the occurrence of the start winning) is transmitted.

  Thereafter, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the special symbol process flag values 0 to 10).

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): When the microcomputer 560 for game control is in a state where variable symbol special display can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory buffer (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage counter. Then, if the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit (whether or not the display result of the variable symbol special display is the specific display result). In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set, and the type of big hit (non-probable big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, etc.) is determined. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether to make a small hit. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (specifically “1”) according to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): For determining a variation pattern that is extracted when a variation pattern of variable display of a special symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) is generated at the time of start winning. Selection is made from among a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the value of a random number (one of display random numbers). Further, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (variation time) until the special symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the special symbol process timer, the special symbol process timer is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (specifically “2”) according to step S302.

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out), the variable symbol display on the special symbol display 8 is displayed. Stop and display the stop symbol. Further, an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command: also referred to as symbol confirmation designation command) for designating stop of variable display of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. The special symbol process timer is started after the special symbol process time is set in the special symbol process timer. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (specifically “3”) according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): When the symbol stop time set in the special symbol changing process has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set. If the jackpot flag is set, the time from when the jackpot symbol is stopped until the jackpot game starts (the jackpot display time) is set in the jackpot control timer, and then the jackpot control timer is started. Let In addition, the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a signal effect (fanfare effect) indicating that the jackpot game is started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Send. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (specifically, “4”) according to step S304. If the big hit flag is not set, it is confirmed whether the small hit flag is set. When the small hit flag is set, after setting the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the start of the small hit game (small hit display time) in the big prize control timer, Start the control timer. Further, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, an effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a special effect (effect for two rounds) in the small hit game is transmitted to the effect control board 80. . Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (specifically “8”) according to step S308. When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, the internal state is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) according to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S304): When the big hit display time has elapsed, control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. In addition, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (specifically “5”) according to step S305. Update.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): A process for confirming the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. In addition, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (specifically, a value corresponding to step S306). Is updated to “6”).

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): When the interval time has elapsed, it is confirmed whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. In addition, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (specifically “5”) according to step S305. Update. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, an effect control command (ending command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is issued. After transmitting to the effect control board 80 and setting the execution time of the big hit end process (big hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value (specifically “7”) according to step S307. To do.

  Big hit end process (step S307): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the big hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value (specifically “0”) according to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): When the small hit display time or interval time has elapsed, it is checked whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the small hit release process is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (specifically “9”) according to step S309. To do. On the other hand, when all rounds are completed, an effect control command (ending command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Is sent to the effect control board 80, and the execution time of the small hit end process (small hit end time) is set in the big winning opening control timer, and then the internal state is a value corresponding to step S310 (specifically “10”). ).

  Opening process for small hits (step S309): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. Then, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state is set to a value (specifically “8”) according to step S308. Update.

  Small hit end process (step S310): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the small hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value (specifically “0”) according to step S300.

  43 to 45 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state in which the variation of the special symbol can be started (the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 (specifically “0”)). In other words, in other words, when the special symbol display 8 does not display the variation of the special symbol and is neither a big hit game nor a small hit (step S51), the starting winning memory number (holding memory number) is set. Confirmation (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the start winning counter is confirmed.

  If the starting winning memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = 1 is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S53), and the starting winning memory number 1 is reduced by 1 and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = n−1.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the current game state (normal game state, probability change state, short time state, etc.) and sets the address of the background designation command transmission table corresponding to the game state to the pointer (step). S55). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (FIG. 58) described later (step S56). If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a normal state background designation command is transmitted. If the current gaming state is the probability variation time short state, the probability variation state background designation command is transmitted, and the current gaming state is short. If it is in a state, a time-short state background designation command is transmitted. In this embodiment, a chance state background designation command is transmitted when the mode is changed to the chance mode suddenly after the end of a game with big odds or small hits.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S57), and executes the jackpot determination processing module (step S58). The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a jackpot determination value determined in advance with a random number value for jackpot determination and determining that the jackpot determination value is a jackpot if they match. Here, in the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a probable change state (including a short time state during probability change), the probability that a big hit will be higher than when the gaming state is a non-probable change state (a normal game state and a short time state). It is configured. Specifically, a high-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a low-probability jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set smaller than the high-probability jackpot determination table are provided. Keep it. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the game state is a probability change state (and a probability change short time state). If the game state is a probability change state, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the high probability big hit determination table to make a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the short time state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the low probability jackpot determination table. With such a configuration, the probability that a big hit is higher in the probability variation state (and the probability variation short time state) than in the normal game state and the short time state.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state (including the probability variation time short state) is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation state is set.

  If the big hit determination module determines that the big hit is not made (N in step S59), the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to the process in step S64 in FIG.

  When it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination module (Y in step S59), a big hit flag is set (step S60). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot type determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S61), and executes the jackpot type (normal jackpot, a probable big hit that does not execute the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect during the jackpot game. A process of determining a probability change big hit to be executed, a probability change big hit to execute a re-lottery effect after completion of the big hit game, and a sudden probability change big hit) is executed (step S62).

  The jackpot type determination process is performed using a jackpot type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, a predetermined number of jackpot type determination random number values are distributed in advance for each jackpot type. The game control microcomputer 560 determines the jackpot type, that is, the jackpot type, that is, the jackpot type jackpot, that is, the jackpot type jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot type jackpot (promotion of the jackpot type) ), Probability jackpot (ending promotion) and sudden chance jackpot. In this way, by determining the big hit type, not only whether the big hit is a normal big hit, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit, whether to execute a re-lottery effect (promotion effect) and what kind of re-lottery effect It is also determined whether to execute at the timing.

  Although not shown in FIG. 43, since only one type of jackpot symbol is provided according to the jackpot type, the jackpot symbol is also automatically determined by determining the jackpot type. Specifically, the non-probability variable symbol “6” is determined for a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the probabilistic variable symbol “7” is determined for a probable big hit, and the sudden probable symbol “5” for a sudden probable big hit. Will be determined.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores (stores) the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S62 in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S63), and proceeds to the processing of step S72 of FIG. .

  In step S63, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S29, FIG. 57) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 58) is executed. Thus, a symbol information designation command (normal jackpot designation command, probability variation big hit 1 designation command, probability variation big hit 2 designation command, probability variation big hit 3 designation command, sudden probability variation big hit designation command) corresponding to the big hit type is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  In step S64 of FIG. 44, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination module for determining whether or not to make a small hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number read in step S57 (step S64). . The small hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined determination value with a big hit determination random number value and executes a process of determining a small hit when they match.

  If it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is determined (Y in step S65), the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S66), and the small hit flag is set. (Step S67). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68). Although not shown in FIG. 44, when it is determined that a small hit is made, the small hit symbol “4” is automatically determined.

  In step S66, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S29, FIG. 57) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 58) is executed. Thereby, a symbol information designation command (small hit designation command) for designating the small hit is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  When it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is not made (N in step S65), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number for symbol determination (one of the display random numbers) from the random number storage buffer. (Step S69) Based on the value of the read out design determining random number, a process of determining a special design out of design is executed (Step S70). One of the symbols “0” to “3”, “8”, and “9” is determined as the special symbol loss symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the decorative symbol information corresponding to the loss in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S71). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68).

  In step S72 of FIG. 45, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the jackpot type determined in step S62 is a probability variation jackpot (including a sudden probability variation jackpot). If it is not a probability variation jackpot (step S72). N), without setting the flag indicating the type of jackpot, the process proceeds to step S82.

  When the probability variation big hit is found (Y in step S72), the probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit occurs is set (step S73). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot is a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S74). If it is a sudden probability change big hit (Y in step S74), a sudden probability change flag indicating that a sudden probability change big hit occurs is set (step S75), and the process proceeds to step S82.

  If it is not suddenly a probable big hit (N in Step S74), it is confirmed whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed (Step S76). When the re-lottery effect is not executed (N in Step S76), the process proceeds to Step S82. When the re-lottery effect is executed (Y in Step S76), the re-drawing effect is executed. A lottery execution flag is set (step S77), and it is confirmed whether the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (step S78). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (Y in step S78), the big hit execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big win is set (step S79), and the process proceeds to step S82. To do. When it is not executed during the big hit (N in Step S78), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Step S80). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Y in step S80), an ending execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set (step S81), and the process proceeds to step S82. . In step S82, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S82).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S201). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change flag is set (step S202). When the sudden probability variation flag is set (Y in step S202), since sudden probability variation big hit occurs, it is determined to use the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation (step S203). Then, the process proceeds to step S207.

  Only the variation pattern (“0EH”) selected in the sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 36 is set in advance in the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation.

  When the probability change flag is not set suddenly (N in step S202), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S204A). When the probability variation big hit flag is set (Y in step S204A), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (step S204B). If the re-lottery execution flag is not set (N in step S204B), a probability variation big hit will occur, so it is decided to use the probability variation big hit variation pattern determination table (step S205).

  In the variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit, variation patterns (“07H” to “0CH”) selected in advance for probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 36 are set, and a plurality of judgment values are assigned to each variation pattern. ing.

  When the re-lottery execution flag is set (Y in step S204B), the non-probable variable symbols are aligned and stopped when the fluctuation is stopped, and a big hit occurs, and the jackpot is promoted to a probable big hit during or after the big hit game (non- Since the effect that the probability variation symbol is promoted to the probability variation symbol is executed, it is determined to use the normal jackpot variation pattern determination table (step S206).

  In step S204A, when the probability variation jackpot flag is not set (N in step S204A), a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) will occur, so it is decided to use the normal jackpot variation pattern determination table ( Step S206).

  In the normal big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (“07H” to “0BH”, “0DH”) selected in advance for the normal big hit shown in FIG. 36 are set in advance, and a plurality of determinations are made for each variation pattern. A value has been assigned.

  In step S207, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the sudden variation variation determination table, the variation pattern for probability variation big hit. The design variation pattern is determined using the determination table or the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S207). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the symbol to be variably displayed next. Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the big hit flag is not set (N in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S208). When the small hit flag is set (Y in step S208), since a small hit occurs, it is decided to use the small hit variation pattern determination table (step S209).

  In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, only the variation pattern (“0FH”) selected in advance for small hits shown in FIG. 36 is set in advance.

  When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S208), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S210). When the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S210), it is determined to use the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state (step S211).

  In the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (“00H”, “02H” to “06H”) selected in advance in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 36 are set in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to.

  On the other hand, when the hour / hour flag is set (Y in step S210), it is decided to use the hour / hour deviation variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state (step S212).

  The fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation at time reduction is set in advance with a variation pattern (“01H” to “06H”) selected at the time of deviation in the time reduction state (including the short period at probability change) shown in FIG. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to the variation pattern.

  Then, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the small hit variation pattern determination table, normal time The variation pattern of the symbol is determined using the variation pattern determination table for deviation or the variation pattern determination table for deviation at the time reduction (step S207). Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In the case of the probability variation state, the variation pattern determination table for deviation is used in the normal time as in the normal gaming state, and in the case of the probability variation short state, the variation pattern for deviation in the time reduction is similar to that in the time reduction state. A variation table is determined using the determination table.

  In step S213, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the variation pattern command data corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S207 in the variation pattern buffer (step S213). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S214). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the address of the variable command transmission table in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S215). In response to this processing being performed, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed in the decorative symbol command control processing (step S29 in FIG. 35, FIG. 57). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the variation number monitoring process (step S216).

  In the fluctuation count monitoring process, the game control microcomputer 560 is changed to a short-time state (except for the short-time state at the time of probability change) after the big hit game ends (when the short-time flag is set), a special symbol after the big hit game ends. The number of fluctuations is counted with a fluctuation number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter has reached a value indicating a predetermined fluctuation count (for example, 100) that can continue the short-time state, and the count value is the predetermined fluctuation count. When the value becomes, the hourly flag is reset. As a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game ends becomes a predetermined number of fluctuations, the time-shifted state is shifted to the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “2”) corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S217).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by 1 (step S221). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer is up (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0) (step S222). If the time is not up (N in step S222) ) And the process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S222), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stop symbol (step S223). . Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the decorative symbol stop designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S224), and executes the command setting process (step S225). As a result, control for transmitting a decorative symbol stop designation command is executed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol process timer, and starts the timer (step S226). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the symbol determination number output time in the special symbol stop information timer (step S227). The special symbol stop information timer is a timer that measures the time (design fixed number output time) for outputting the symbol fixed number signal in the information output process described later. Note that the symbol determination frequency output time is 500 ms. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically “3”) corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S303) (step S228).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by 1 (step S231). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0) (step S232). If the time is not up (N in step S232), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S232), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S233). If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S233), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the jackpot symbol in the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. The time from the display until the big winning opening is opened (a big hit display time) is set (step S234). In the jackpot display time, an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the jackpot game is started is executed.

  Note that different jackpot display times may be set for the big hit of 15 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds. In this case, for example, the jackpot display time is 3 seconds for a big hit of 15 rounds, and the jackpot display time is 5 seconds for a big hit of two rounds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the fanfare command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type to the pointer (step S235), and executes the command setting process (step S236). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. For the big hit type, the probability change big hit flag is set, suddenly the probability change flag is set, the re-draw lotion execution flag is set, the big hit execution flag is set, or the ending execution flag is set It can be confirmed based on whether or not. After that, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304) (step S237).

  When the big hit flag is set and the game goes to the big hit gaming state, if the probability change flag or the time reduction flag is set, these flags are reset. This is to prevent a high base state during the big hit game.

  If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S233), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S238). If the small hit flag is set (Y of step S238), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the time from the small winning symbol stop display to the big prize opening control timer until the big prize opening is released ( The small hit display time) is set (step S239). As described above, the small hit design of the decorative design is the same design as the sudden probability variation design. Further, when the small hit game is started, the same two-round effect as when the sudden probability big hit is started is started.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the small hitting fanfare command transmission table in the pointer (step S240), and executes command setting processing (step S241). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command for small hitting is executed. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “8”) corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S242).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S238), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S243). ).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (step S401), and confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 ( Step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S402), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds or 2 rounds (step S403). ). If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, or if the probability variation jackpot flag is set but suddenly the probability variation flag is not set, it can be determined that the round is a big hit of 15 rounds. When the probability variation flag is set, it can be determined that the game is a big hit of two rounds.

  If it is a big hit for 15 rounds (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command sending table for the 15 round big hits in the big prize opening opening command pointer to the pointer (step S404), and sets the command. Is executed (step S405). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. Note that the number of rounds is a value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game (the value indicating the actual number of rounds in the big hit game is a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the round number count. Steps S410 and S446. The same applies to S457). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (opening / closing blade 20) (step S406), and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S407).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 turns on / off the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port in step S406. The content related to off is set according to the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area of the output port in the output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the output circuit 59. The output circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid to the solenoid in accordance with the drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  In addition, the maximum time (15-round round time) that can be opened in each round of the 15 round big hits is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S408). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S403 (N in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command winning table during the big winning opening release command for the two rounds big hit in the pointer (step S409). ), Command set processing is executed (step S410). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S411) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S412). In addition, the maximum time for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of two rounds (round time for two rounds) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S413). The round time for 2 rounds is a short time, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, in the big hit of two rounds, ten game balls (the maximum number of game balls that can be won) will not win the big prize opening during the round. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S421). And it is confirmed whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds (whether it is a big hit of 15 rounds or a big hit of 2 rounds) (step S422).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S423). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S423), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S424). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S424), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S424), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter that counts the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S425). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S426). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S426), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S424) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing blade 20) (step S427). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command transmission table after opening the big winning opening for 15 rounds big hit to the pointer (step S429), and executes the command setting process (step S430). As a result, control for transmitting a command after opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds that specifies a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round) is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the big win of 15 rounds in the big prize opening control timer ( In step S431), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “6”) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  If it is a big hit of two rounds (N in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (step S433), and the value of the big prize control timer If is not 0 (N in step S433), the process is terminated as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S433), the solenoid 21 is driven to perform control for closing the big prize opening (opening / closing blade 20) (step S434).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the display command transmission table after the two-round big winning opening is opened to the pointer (step S435), and executes the command setting process (step S436). As a result, the control for transmitting a command after opening the big winning opening for two rounds for specifying the display state according to the number of rounds after the opening of the big winning opening (after the end of the round) is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for two rounds) in the big winning prize control timer (two rounds). In step S437), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “6”) corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 2 rounds is the same as the interval time for 15 rounds, for example, 5 seconds.

  FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening post-process (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the post-opening process for the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S441), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or not. (Step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of rounds is 15 rounds (15 rounds or 2 rounds Is determined (step S443).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S444). If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in Step S444), the address of the command transmission table for the 15 round round big prize opening open command transmission table is set in the pointer (Step S445), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S446). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the solenoid 21 to be driven to open the special winning opening (opening / closing blade 20) (step S447), and increments the value of the round number counter (step S448).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a round time for 15 rounds in the special winning opening control timer (step S449). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “5”) corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S450).

  If the value of the round counter is 15 (Y in step S444), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the ending command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type in the pointer (step S451), and sets the command Processing is executed (step S452). Thereby, control for transmitting an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time (execution time of the ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot in the jackpot control timer (step S453), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value (specifically, “7”) according to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S454).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S443 (N in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S455 in FIG. 52). If the value of the round counter is not 2 (N in Step S455), the address of the command transmission table for the 2 round big hit big winning opening is set in the pointer (Step S456), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S457). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S458) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S459). Further, the round time for two rounds is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S460). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “5”) corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S461).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S455), the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly sets the address of the ending command transmission table for the probability variation big hit in the pointer (step S462), and sets the command. Processing is executed (step S463). As a result, the control for suddenly transmitting the ending command for probability variation big hit is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a big hit end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S464), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, a big hit end process (step S307)). "7") (step S465).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S471). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S472). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S472), the process is terminated as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S472), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a game state setting process after the big hit (step S473).

  In the game state setting process after the big hit, the process of setting / resetting the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag corresponding to the game state after the big hit game is completed is executed. Specifically, when the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state after the big hit game is finished, only the short-time flag is set. When the gaming state is shifted to the probability change time-short state after the game ends, the probability change flag and the time-short flag are set.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the jackpot flag (step S474). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S475), and the sudden probability variation flag is set. In this case, the probability variation flag is suddenly reset (step S476). If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery execution flag is reset (step S477). If the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit execution is executed. The flag is reset (step S478). Further, if the ending execution flag is set, the ending execution flag is reset (step S479).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “0”) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S480).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by 1 (step S501), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step). S502). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S502), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S502), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S503). If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (N in step S503), the solenoid 21 is driven to perform control for opening the special winning opening (opening / closing blade 20) (step S504), and the value of the round number counter Is incremented by 1 (step S505).

  In addition, the maximum time (round time for small hits) in which the big winning opening can be opened in each round in the small hit is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S506). Note that the round time for small hits is the same as the round time for two rounds (for example, 5 seconds). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “9”) corresponding to the small hit releasing process (step S309) (step S507).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S503), 560 sets a small hit end time for notifying the player of the end of the small hit in the big prize opening control timer (step S508), The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “10”) corresponding to the small hit end process (step S310) (step S509).

  In addition, during the small hit game, the control for transmitting the special winning opening open command is not executed.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release processing, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S511). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S512). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S512), the processing is ended as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S512), the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening (opening / closing blade 20). (Step S513).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time (interval time for small hits) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the small winnings of the two rounds in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S514), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “8”) corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (Step S308) (Step S515). The interval time for small hits is, for example, 5 seconds.

  During the small hit game, the control for transmitting the command after the big winning opening is released is not executed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S531). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S532). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S532), the process is terminated. If the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0 (Y in step S532), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the small hit flag (step S533) and sets the special symbol process flag value to the special symbol normal symbol. The value (specifically “0”) corresponding to the process (step S300) is updated (step S534).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol command control process (step S29). In the decorative symbol command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer onto the pointer (step S551), and loads the data pointed to by the pointer (step S552). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is the timing for transmitting the variation pattern command, the address of the variation command transmission table is stored in the decoration symbol command transmission pointer in step S215 of the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process (step S27). The data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variable command transmission table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the variation pattern command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the variation pattern command (Y in Step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes command set processing (Step S554). As a result, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 58) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer is changed from the address of the variable command transmission table to the symbol information designation command. This is the address of the transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. It has become. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the symbol information designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting a symbol information designation command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set processing (FIG. 58) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer starts from the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. This is the address of the storage designation command transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is transmitted to the start winning memory designation command. It is the address of the table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether it is the timing to transmit the start winning memory designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table. .

  When it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). Thereby, control for transmitting the start winning memory designation command is executed. The start prize memory designation command is an effect control command for designating (notifying) the current start prize memory number (holding memory number). Is set as a value designated by the start winning memory designation command. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  In this case, when the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1 in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 58) executed in step S554, the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command by the address pointed to by the pointer. The address is not shown. Accordingly, in the decorative symbol command control process when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the decorative symbol command transmission pointer is loaded again into the pointer (step S551), and the data pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S552). Whether or not it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command is determined (step S553), but it is determined in step S553 that it is not the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing command set processing. The command set process is executed in steps S56, S225, S236, S241, S260, S266, S405, S410, S430, S436, S446, S452, S457, S463, S554, and S1587. In steps S13 and S43, the command is transmitted by setting the address of the command transmission table to the pointer and executing the command setting process.

  In the command set process, the game control microcomputer 560 first loads the command data 1 pointed to by the address in the command transmission table (step S561), and executes the command transmission process (step S562).

  In the command transmission process, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs a transmission command (effect control command) to the serial output circuit 78. As a result, the MODE data of the first byte in the 2-byte configuration effect control command is converted from parallel data to serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and then output to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S563). Then, the address of the command transmission table is saved in the stack or the like (step S564).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 tests the work area reference designation bit (bit 7) of the command data 2 (step S565), and determines whether or not the value of the work area reference designation bit of the command data 2 is “0”. Is determined (step S566). If it is not 0 (N in step S566), the head address of the command extended data address table is set in the pointer (step S567), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the pointer. (Step S568). Then, the data (command extension data) in the area pointed to by the address (pointer) is loaded (step S569).

  In the command extended data address table, EXT data (second byte data in a 2-byte effect control command) that can be sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference designation bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference designation bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the command extension data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command transmission process (step S570). Accordingly, a transmission command (production control command) is output to the serial output circuit 78. As a result, the second byte of EXT data in the 2-byte effect control command is converted from parallel data to serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and then output to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the command transmission table (step S571), and adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S572). When the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, if the address is the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, as described above, the decorative symbol command control process performs the decorative symbol command control processing. If the transmission process (command set process) is executed and the address is not the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative design command, the decorative design command transmission process (command set process) is not executed in the decorative design command control process.

  As described above, an effect control command having a 2-byte configuration is output to the serial output circuit 78, converted from parallel data to serial data by the serial output circuit 78, and output to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S111), the game switch microcomputer 560 performs the gate switch passage process (step S112). Execute. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S100 to S103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (step S112): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the count value of the gate passage memory counter (the number of gate passage memories) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passing gates. .

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S100): The game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100) The normal symbol display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10). Confirms the value of the gate passing memory number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S101): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10, The normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S102).

  Normal symbol stop processing (step S102): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. To do. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state, and if it is a high base state, an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) in the high base state is selected, If in the low base state, the release pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the low base state is selected, and the selected release pattern is set. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S103).

  Ordinary electric accessory actuating process (step S103): The game control microcomputer 560 wins a game ball to the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) on the condition that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out. The ordinary electric accessory winning count process for counting the number (the number of winnings to the second start winning opening 14) is executed, and the ordinary electric accessory is released with the set opening pattern (of the variable winning ball apparatus 15). (Open / close operation is executed) Normal electric accessory release pattern processing is executed. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal process (step S100). In the normal symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S121). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step S121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S121), the game control microcomputer 560 reads out the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S122). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the gate passing memory number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the normal symbol per-determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S124), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value (step S125). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for normal symbol determination matches the hit determination value, and if there is a matching hit determination value, it is determined to be a hit. For example, when the hour / short flag is set, that is, when the base state is high (short time state, short state when probability change), the hit determination value is any one of 1 to 10, and when the low base state, the hit determination value is 3 or 7 and so on. If the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 10, the winning probability in the high base state is 10/11, and the winning probability in the low base state is 2/11. As described above, the hit is made with a high probability in the high base state, and the win is made only with a low probability in the low base state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol change time in the normal symbol process timer (step S126), and starts the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10 (step S127). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the variation time of the normal symbol at the time of the low base is 30.0 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol at the time of the high base is 1.0 seconds. . Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S101) (step S128).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S101). In the normal symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S131). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S135).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (Y in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10. (Step S132). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer (step S133). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S102) (step S134).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S102). In the normal symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S141). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S142).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. (Whether or not it is determined to be a win in step S125) is confirmed (step S143). Note that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting the normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step S125, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

  When the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S143), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (step S144). The ordinary electric accessory operating time is the maximum time during which the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) can operate. The normal electric accessory operating time is set to be longer in the high base state than in the low base state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the game state is a high base state or a low base state (step S145). Whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state can be confirmed by checking whether or not the time reduction flag is set. When the time reduction flag is set, it can be determined that the high base state is set, and when the time reduction flag is not set, it can be determined that the low base state is set. In the high base state, a high base state flag indicating the high base state is set, and whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state is determined depending on whether or not the flag is set. You may do it.

  When in the high base state (Y in step S145), the game control microcomputer 560 selects the release pattern set in the high base time table shown in FIG. S146). On the other hand, when it is in the low base state (N in step S145), the game control microcomputer 560 selects the release pattern set in the low base time table shown in FIG. (Step S147). In the example shown in FIG. 63, the low base time table is set with open pattern data with an open time of 0.5 seconds and a single open count. Also, in the high base time table, data of an opening pattern with an opening time of 2.5 seconds and an opening frequency of 2 is set.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern selected in step S146 or S147 in the release pattern buffer (step S148). When the opening pattern is set in the opening pattern buffer, the opening pattern time (in this case, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set) is added to the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern timer (the timer for measuring the opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric accessory). A process of setting a closing time until the first opening is performed is also performed. Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S103) (step S149).

  In step S143, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but an off symbol (N in step S143), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal symbol normal flag. The value (specifically “0”) indicating the process (step S100) is updated (step S150).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory operating process (step S103). In the ordinary electric actor operation process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S161). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S162).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (step S163). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected.

  The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (corresponding bit of the second start port switch 14a) (step S164). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14). If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in step S164), the process proceeds to step S168. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in step S164), the second start port switch 14a is turned on. The number of the number of game balls won in the winning ball apparatus 15) is incremented by 1 (step S165). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is less than 8 (step S166). If the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is not less than 8 (N in step S166), that is, if it is 8 or more, the game control microcomputer 560 clears (sets to 0) the value of the normal symbol process timer. (Step S167). With this process, the ordinary electric accessory actuating process is completed (see Y in step S161, S172). Thus, in this embodiment, when eight or more game balls win the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the normal electric accessory operating process is terminated.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (step S168). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has expired (step S169). If not timed out (N in step S169), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in step S169), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer (step S170). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 16 to open or close the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (step S171).

  Specifically, when the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the release time is set as the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer, and the output port buffer ( The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by inverting the solenoid output bit of the ordinary electric accessory of the solenoid buffer. When the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, a closing time is set as an open pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer, and the normal output port buffer (solenoid buffer) The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by reversing the electric accessory solenoid output bit.

  By the processes in steps S168 to S171 described above, an open pattern in the low base state and an open pattern in the high base state are realized. When the gaming state is in the low base state, the opening time is 0.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is one, so that, for example, 1.0 seconds from the start of the normal electric accessory activation process When the closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 0.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, the release time is 2.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is 2, so that, for example, 2.5 after the normal electric accessory actuating process is started. When the second closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. When the closing time of 5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed.

  In step S161, when the normal symbol process timer expires (Y in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100) (specifically, step S100). Is updated to “0”) (step S172).

  Next, control signals transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout command signal and the like transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The power supply confirmation signal is a signal that is at a high level (on state) when the main board 31 rises, and is at a low level (off state) when power supply is detected. The prize ball REQ signal is a signal (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request) that becomes a low level (on state) when a prize ball payout request (when a prize ball number command is transmitted). The prize ball REQ signal becomes a high level (off state) when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on after being turned on from the payout control microcomputer 370. The 4-bit award ball number signal is a signal (award ball number command) output for designating the number (1 to 15) of game balls to be paid out.

  The prize ball BUSY signal is a signal that is set to a high level (on state) when the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the on state of the prize ball REQ signal, and is turned off after a predetermined period. That is, it corresponds to an acceptance confirmation signal for the prize ball REQ signal. Therefore, the state in which the prize ball BUSY signal is OFF corresponds to a state of waiting for a prize ball number command reception. The payout error signal is a signal that becomes a high level (ON state) when a prize ball payout error occurs. The ball-out signal is a signal that becomes high level (ON state) when the ball-out switch 187 is turned on. The full tank signal is a signal that becomes high level (ON state) when the full switch 48 is turned on. The prize ball count signal is a payout control signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 and is a signal corresponding to a detection signal of the payout number count switch 301. The door opening 1 signal is a signal that becomes a high level (ON state) when the door opening switch (1) 154 is turned on. The door open 2 signal is a signal that becomes a high level (on state) when the door open switch (2) 155 is turned on.

  The prize ball REQ signal becomes low level (on state) when a prize ball payout request is made (when a prize ball number command is transmitted), and when a prize ball payout completion is received (when the prize ball BUSY signal is off). The signal is set to a high level (off state), and the prize ball BUSY signal is set to a high level (on state) when a prize ball payout request is received (when the prize ball REQ signal is on), and low when the prize is completed. It may be a signal to be turned off. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal when the prize ball payout is requested, and the payout control microcomputer 370 turns on the prize ball BUSY signal when the prize ball REQ signal is turned on. When the required number of prize balls is paid out, the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off, and the game control microcomputer 560 turns off the prize ball BUSY signal. The prize ball REQ signal may be turned off.

  66 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. FIG. 66 shows that signals indicating an abnormality related to payout (payout error signal, out of ball signal, full tank signal) are also transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. Yes. In FIG. 66, a signal indicating that the glass door frame 2 and the mechanism plate 105 are opened (door opening 1 signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. It is shown. FIG. 66 also shows that a signal (door opening 2 signal) indicating that the game frame 11 has been opened is input to the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Further, in FIG. 66, a door open signal (a signal indicating that at least one of the door open 1 signal and the door open 2 signal is on) is received from the backup power source 506 mounted on the main board 31. Is also output.

  Also, a prize ball count signal indicating a state of a detection signal of the number-of-payout count switch 301 at the time of prize ball payout is transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 66, the power confirmation signal, the prize ball REQ signal, and the prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67, and the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. Is input. A signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 is output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B, and is input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 68. The

  FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout command signal and the like. As shown in FIG. 67, the winning detection switch (the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a) detects the winning of the game ball. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and turns the output state of the prize ball number signal into a state corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with winning. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine by a detection signal of the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set in accordance with the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. Put it in a state.

  In this embodiment, five game balls are paid out when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, and 15 game balls are detected when the count switch 23 detects a game ball. Perform prize ball payout. When game balls are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, seven prize balls are paid out. Further, as described above, since the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, among the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits, the lower 4 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in actuality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  The payout control microcomputer 370 continues the on state of the award ball BUSY signal for a predetermined time (award ball BUSY signal on time) when the award ball REQ signal is turned on. Is turned off. In the payout control microcomputer 370, the ball payout device 97 is operated to execute the prize ball payout processing. Specifically, the payout motor 289 is rotated by the number designated by the prize ball number signal, and the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number signal is paid out. The payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of the prize ball, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 each time the prize ball detects the payout. The payout control microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball count signal to the game control microcomputer 560 each time a detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is input.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 confirms that the prize ball BUSY signal has changed to the OFF state, the game control microcomputer 560 turns the prize ball BUSY signal to the OFF state after a predetermined time (a prize ball REQ signal OFF waiting time) has elapsed. At that time, the output state of the prize ball number signal is cleared and turned off. That is, a state in which the prize ball number signal indicates 0 (a state in which an invalid command is output) is set.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is certainly turned on. Specifically, the switch process is activated every 2 ms. However, if it is detected that both the switch process activated at the present time and the switch process activated 2 ms before are turned on, the switch process is surely performed. Determined to be on.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The last-time port buffer is a buffer in which the switch-on / off determination result of the last time (assuming 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer that stores the previous switch-on / off determination result (assumed to be 2 ms before). As described above, in the switch-on buffer, when a switch on is detected, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch, and when a switch off is detected, 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch. It is a buffer. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. Further, the bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times in advance corresponds to the bit arrangement of the input port 0. That is, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 0 to 7 of input port 0 is set to bits 0 to 7 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times before.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the content of the previous port buffer to the previous data (step S331). Further, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (step S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (step S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step S334).

  Then, input port 0 data is input (step S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (step S336). The processes in steps S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the data input from the input port 0 and the previous data (step S337). At this stage, in the previous data, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals of the seven switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port 0 is taken in step S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port 0 and 2 ms before The bit whose state has changed from the state 4 ms before becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The game control microcomputer 560 stores the result of the AND operation in the switch-on buffer (step S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the detection signal of the switch corresponding to the bit which is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice in succession, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms, so it is determined that the ON state of the detection signal is not due to noise or the like. It can be done.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S1201) and a prize ball control process (step S1202). Then, the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55 are output to port 0 (step S1203). The contents of the port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process.

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 71 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set at the start address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball is to be paid out by winning from the next address. The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 21).

  In the example shown in FIG. 71, the number of prize balls is five when winning at any of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 is won. The number of winning balls may be different depending on whether or not the second start winning opening 14 is won. For example, the number of winning balls for winning at the second start winning opening 14 is made larger than the number of winning balls for winning at the first starting winning opening 13. In such a case, the base in the time-short state can be further increased.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the award ball number adding process in step S1201. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start address of the winning ball number table as a pointer (step S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S353).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (step S355). . Further, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 (step S356).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is not 0 (N in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the process proceeds to step S362A. If the calculation result in step S355 is 0 (Y in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S359), and if the number of processes is 0 The process ends, and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S354 (step S360).

  In step S362A, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is a count switch input bit determination value. That is, it is confirmed whether or not it is confirmed in step S361 that the count switch 23 is turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the count switch 23).

  If the switch input bit determination value is the count switch input bit determination value (Y in step S362A), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more ( Step S362B). That the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more means that the processing after the pre-opening process of the big winning opening in step S304 is executed in the special symbol process. That is, it means that a big hit game or a small hit game is being played. Here, during the big hit game, it is a period from when the big hit display is started until the big hit end processing is ended. Further, during the small hit game, it is a period from the start of the small hit display until the end of the small hit end process. In other words, the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 or more indicates that there is a possibility that control for opening the big prize opening may be performed when the game control is normally executed. .

  When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (Y in step S362B), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of prize balls) as a prize ball. The added value is set (step S364), and the prize ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 is a state where the big hit game and the small hit game are not executed and the control for opening the big winning opening is not executed. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on in such a state, it means that an abnormal prize has occurred at the big prize opening or that the detection signal from the count switch 23 has a noise over a long period (over 4 ms). Means that you got on. Therefore, when it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on in a state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 (N in step S362B), the prize ball addition value is added to the total prize ball number storage buffer. Do not execute control. That is, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on is not executed (the processes in steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the count switch input bit determination value (N in step S362A), the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is the second start port switch input. It is confirmed whether or not the bit determination value has been reached (step S363A). That is, it is confirmed in step S361 whether or not the second start port switch 14a has been turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the second start port switch 14a).

  If the switch input bit determination value is the second start port switch input bit determination value (Y in step S363A), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 or not. (Step S363B). That the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 means that the normal electric accessory actuating process of step S103 is being executed in the normal symbol process. That is, it means that the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) is being opened and closed.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the second start port switch input bit determination value (N in Step S363A) and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (Y in Step S363B), the game control The microcomputer 560 sets the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the prize ball number) to the prize ball addition value (step S364), and the prize ball addition value is 16 bits formed in the RAM 55. Is added to the contents of the total number of winning balls storage buffer (step S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 is a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is not operating and control for opening the variable winning ball device 15 is not executed. In such a state, it is detected that the second start opening switch 14a is turned on. This means that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 or a detection signal from the second start opening switch 14a is long. This means that noise has been applied for a period (over 4 ms). Therefore, when it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S363B), the prize ball addition value is added to the total prize ball number storage buffer. Do not execute the control. That is, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on is not executed (steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  In the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag, but actually opens the big winning opening. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on when the count switch 23 is not turned on, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on may not be executed. However, when configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. Since the big winning opening is opened or closed over a plurality of rounds, it is determined whether or not the abnormal winning has occurred by judging whether or not the actual winning opening is controlled. To be complicated.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the big prize opening and the position where the count switch 23 is installed, it is determined whether or not the control for actually opening the big prize opening is performed, and whether or not an abnormal prize has occurred. In determining whether or not, it is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won a prize winning slot immediately before closing after performing a control for closing the prize winning opening. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the big prize opening to the position where the count switch 23 is installed. In other words, it is necessary to start the determination as to whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred after a certain period of time has passed since the control for actually closing the special winning opening is performed. This also complicates the processing.

  However, as in this embodiment, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred after the big winning end processing or the small winning end processing is completed, It is not necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow between the entrance of the mouth and the position where the count switch 23 is installed. This is because the game ball that has won the big winning opening immediately before closing has reached the installation position of the count switch 23 during the processing period of the big hit end processing or the small hit end processing after the big winning opening is closed. In this embodiment, during the processing period of the big hit end process or the small hit end process, that is, the period during which the big hit end display or the small hit end display is made on the variable display device 9, It is set longer than the time required to reach the installation position of the count switch 23.

  Also, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 based on the value of the normal symbol process flag (see step S363B). When the ball device 15 is not opened (that is, when the variable winning ball device 15 repeats the opening / closing operation based on the opening pattern corresponding to the gaming state in the ordinary electric game machine operation processing shown in FIG. 64, the variable winning ball device 15 When it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on when the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the prize ball payout may not be executed. However, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. For example, when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened or closed a plurality of times (twice in the embodiment) as in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 15 is actually opened. If it is determined whether or not the control is performed and it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, the processing becomes complicated. However, the processing can be simplified by determining based on the normal symbol process flag.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the second start winning opening 14 and the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a, is it actually controlled to open the variable winning ball apparatus 15 or not? When determining whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, a game ball that may have won the second start winning opening 14 immediately after closing after taking control of the variable winning ball device 15 is considered. There is a need to. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the second start winning opening 14 to the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a. Therefore, in this embodiment, the timing for determining the abnormal winning is delayed from the timing for closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15.

  Specifically, the time until the normal symbol process timer times out after the variable winning ball device 15 is closed last (that is, from when the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in step S171 to Y in step S161). Is set longer than the time until the game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 reaches the installation position of the second start opening 14a. That is, in step S170, a closing time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as an opening pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer, and until the ordinary symbol process timer times out after the ordinary electric accessory is finally closed in step S171. The normal electric accessory operating time is set so that the time becomes shorter (for example, 3 seconds) than the closing time (for example, 5 seconds) (step S144). The time until the normal symbol process timer times out after the ordinary electric accessory is closed for the last time (for example, 3 seconds), the game ball that won the second start winning opening 14 is placed at the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a. It is sufficiently longer than the time to reach. By doing so, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an abnormal winning has occurred due to the winning of the game ball immediately before the variable winning ball device 15 is closed.

  As a method of delaying the timing for determining the abnormal winning ball from the timing for closing the variable winning ball device 15, in the above example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. However, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, the abnormal winning determination is made, but at the same time as the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Alternatively, the abnormal winning determination may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Specifically, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed from 3 to 0 (for example, immediately before or immediately after step S172 in FIG. 64), a predetermined time is set in the count timer, and every timer interruption (every 2 ms) ) Count down the count timer. When it is determined in the award ball number addition process that the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in Step S363B), it is determined whether or not the count timer is 0. When the count timer is 0, Step S364 is performed. The process of S365 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of step S359. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to delay the timing for determining an abnormal winning with respect to the timing for closing the variable winning ball device 15.

  It should be noted that, even in the determination of an abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method can be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20). Specifically, when the value of the special symbol process flag is changed from 7 to 0 or from 10 to 0, a predetermined time is set in the count timer, and the count timer is counted down every timer interrupt (every 2 ms). Go. When it is determined in the prize ball number addition process that the value of the special symbol process flag is not 4 or more (N in step S362B), it is determined whether or not the count timer is 0. When the count timer is 0, step S364 is performed. , S365 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S359.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 in step S362B (N in step S362B) or the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 in step S363B (N in step S363B), prize ball payout is prohibited. The control to be performed may not be performed. As will be described later, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives an abnormal win. This is because it is considered that the generation of the prize ball based on the abnormal winning can be stopped to the minimum since the occurrence is notified.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in step S1202. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes any one of steps S1231 to S1234 according to the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the prize waiting process 1 (step S1231) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. In the award ball waiting process 1, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is on (step S1241). At this stage, since the prize ball BUSY signal should not be in the on state, when the prize ball BUSY signal is in the on state, the prize ball abnormal state output value (20 (H)) is stored in the port 0 buffer. To end the processing (step S1242). When the prize ball abnormal state output value is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are outputted to port 0 in step S1203 (see FIG. 70), whereby a prize ball REQ signal, a power supply confirmation signal, and All the prize ball number signals are turned off (see FIG. 19).

  If the prize ball BUSY signal is off, the prize ball waiting output value (30 (H)) is set in the port 0 buffer (step S1243). When the output value during waiting for a prize ball is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are output to port 0 in step S1203, whereby the prize ball REQ signal is turned off, and the power confirmation signal The on state is maintained (see FIG. 19). In addition, the award ball number signal enters an invalid command (00 (H)). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball timer is 0 (step S1244). If the prize ball timer is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 (step S1245), and the process is terminated. The prize ball timer is a timer for measuring the time required for prize ball processing. At this stage, if the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the next prize ball after the previous payout process is completed. Waiting time until the REQ signal is turned on (time for providing intervals between a plurality of prize ball REQ signals during the on period when prize ball payout is continuously executed, 00 (H ) During which the award ball number signal is output). The prize ball timer is set in step S1275 of the prize ball waiting process 3 described later. In addition, after the execution of the award ball waiting process 3 in step S1234 is completed and the previous payout process is completed, the processes of steps S1243 to S1245 turn off the award ball REQ signal and are invalid as the award ball number signal. This is a process for outputting a command (00 (H)).

  If the value of the prize ball timer is 0, the game control microcomputer 560 then checks the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S1247). If the value is 0, the process ends. If not, the prize ball process code value is set to 1 (step S1248), and the process ends.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission process (step S1232) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. In the prize ball transmission process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S1251). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S1252). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S1253).

  Thereafter, the output value (10 (H)) in the prize ball REQ is set in the port 0 buffer (step S1254). When the output value in the prize ball REQ is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are outputted to the port 0 in step S1203, so that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on, and the power confirmation signal The on state is maintained (see FIG. 19). Further, the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the lower 4 bits of the port 0 buffer (step S1255). Thereafter, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 2 (step S1256), and the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the maximum value of the prize ball command is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number signal designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is transmitted to the payout control board 37.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a prize waiting process 2 (step S1233) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 2. In the game control microcomputer 560, whether or not the prize ball BUSY signal output (turned on) by the payout control means in response to the prize ball REQ being turned on in the prize ball waiting process 2 is turned on. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1261). When the on-state is not turned on, a BUSY start determination time value (for example, 2) is set in the prize ball timer (step S1262). The BUSY start determination time value is for the game control microcomputer 560 to confirm that the prize ball BUSY signal has been output (turned on) if the prize ball BUSY signal remains on for the time indicated by the value. Is the value of

  Accordingly, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on (step S1263), and if the value is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 ( Step S1264), the process is terminated. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, it is determined that the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on, and the contents of the prize ball number buffer are changed from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (the number of prize balls paid out to the payout control means). Is subtracted (step S1265). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S1266), and the process is terminated.

  In the prize ball transmission process shown in FIG. 75 and the prize ball waiting process 2 shown in FIG. 76, the game control microcomputer 560 sends the prize ball number signal within a predetermined period after sending the prize ball number signal. When the award ball BUSY signal from is not received, control for stopping the progress of the game may be performed. Specifically, in the prize ball transmission process shown in FIG. 75, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal (step S1254), and then monitors the prize ball BUSY on monitor value (here. The monitoring timer is a timer for detecting the occurrence of a communication abnormality, and the prize ball BUSY on monitoring value is a value until the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on when the payout control means and the communication line are normal. (It is a value corresponding to the time with a margin). In the award ball waiting process 2 shown in FIG. 76, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is turned on (step S1261). 1 is subtracted from the value of. When the value of the monitoring timer becomes 0, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines that an abnormality in communication with the payout control means has occurred, specifically, the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on. If not, control is performed to stop the progress of the game.

  The game control microcomputer 560 saves the current control state, for example, the output state of the output port, in the RAM 55 before stopping the progress of the game, and then clears the output state of the output port. Then, the progress of the game is stopped until the abnormality of communication with the payout control means is resolved. That is, even if a new event (game ball winning or the like) occurs, processing corresponding to the new event is not performed, for example, a newly generated event is stored. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 sends a communication error display command to the effect control means of the effect control board 80 in order to notify the occurrence of communication abnormality using the variable display device 9 or the like before stopping the progress of the game. It may be configured to transmit. When the communication abnormality is resolved, the game control microcomputer 560 can restore the output port based on the control state stored in the RAM 55.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the prize ball waiting process 3 (step S1234) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 3. In the award ball waiting process 3, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is turned off (step S1271). When not in the off state, a BUSY end determination time value (for example, 3) is set in the prize ball timer (step S1272). The BUSY end determination time value is a value for creating a prize ball REQ signal OFF waiting period.

  Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off (step S1273), and if the value is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 ( Step S1274), the process is terminated. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, that is, when the prize ball REQ signal off waiting period ends, the prize ball REQ waiting time is set in the prize ball timer (step S1275). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 (step S1276), and the process is terminated. As described above, the award ball REQ waiting time is the waiting time until the next award ball REQ signal is turned on (when award ball payout is continuously performed, the on periods of a plurality of award ball REQ signals are Is a time for providing an interval).

  Through the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the total number of game balls as prize balls to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout condition in the total prize ball number storage buffer so as to be specified. The total award ball number storage buffer corresponds to a prize game medium number storage means for storing stored contents for at least a predetermined period by a backup power source as a variable data storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Further, the game control means transmits a payout command signal for designating a payout number of a predetermined number of prize balls to the payout control means based on the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Here, the predetermined number is 15 if the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer is 15 or more, and is stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer if it is less than 15. The number of prize balls. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a subtraction process is performed for subtracting the number of payouts specified by the payout command signal from the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined condition for executing the subtraction process is when a command acceptance signal is received from the payout control microcomputer 370, specifically when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on. When the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 has not yet paid out the number of prize balls instructed by the payout command signal. If configured to perform subtraction processing of the total prize ball number storage buffer when the winning ball payout is completed, an illegal act of restoring the power supply after illegally stopping the power supply of the gaming machine during paying the winning ball As a result, a large number of prize balls are illegally paid out. For example, when 15 prize ball payouts are instructed by a payout command signal, when 10 prize ball payouts are made, if the power supply is restored after illegally stopping the power supply of the gaming machine, Since the contents of the total number of winning balls storage buffer are not subtracted at all, it is assumed that the ten winning balls are not paid out even though ten winning balls are actually paid out. Control will continue.

  However, in this embodiment, when the winning ball BUSY signal is turned on, that is, when the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the payout command signal and transmits the command acceptance signal, the subtraction processing of the total winning ball number storage buffer Since the above is executed, the above fraud can be prevented.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process in step S23A. In the abnormal winning notification process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether an abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (step S251). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in a main process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44 in FIG. 33). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S255. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S252). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S253 and S254).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (step S255). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (Y in step S255), the game is in the big hit game or the small hit game. If it is in such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big prize opening, so the process proceeds to the process of step S261 without performing the process of confirming the abnormal winning to the big prize opening.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 is a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is played. In this state, if there is a game ball winning at the big winning opening, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, an abnormal winning confirmation process for the special winning opening shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 (N in step S255), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S256). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (01 (H), see FIG. 71) (step S257). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 01 (H), that is, when the count switch 23 is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the count switch 23 is not turned on, the operation result of the logical product is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S258), it is determined that an abnormal winning in the special winning opening has occurred, and control is performed to transmit an abnormal winning notification designating command to the effect control board 80 (step S258). S259, S260). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the abnormal winning notification designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S259), and executes the command setting process (step S260). On the other hand, if the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S258), it is determined that no abnormal winning in the special winning opening has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S261.

  In step S261, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (step S261). The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 is a state where the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is opened and closed. If it is in such a state (Y in step S261), there is a possibility that the game ball may win the second start winning opening 14, so that an abnormal winning confirmation to the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. The winning notification process is terminated.

  The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S261) is a state where the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is not opened or closed. If there is a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 in such a state, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, the abnormal winning confirmation process to the second start winning opening 14 shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S261), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S262). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the content of the loaded switch-on buffer and the second start port switch input bit determination value (80 (H), see FIG. 71) (step S263). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S264), it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, and control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification designating command to the effect control board 80 is performed. This is performed (steps S265 and S266). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the abnormal winning notification designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S265), and executes the command setting process (step S266). On the other hand, if the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S261), it is determined that no abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, and control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification designation command is performed. The abnormal winning notification process is terminated.

  When the count switch 23 is turned on in a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is performed by the above processing, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted. The abnormal winning notification designation command is also transmitted when the second start opening switch 14a is turned on while the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not opened or closed.

  In addition, the process of steps S251 to S253 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the production control microcomputer 100 is performing initialization notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the initialization notification.

  In this embodiment, in the prohibition period after the power is turned on, the abnormal winning notification based on the abnormal winning to the special winning opening is prohibited (the processing of steps S255 to S260 is not executed). The abnormal winning notification based on the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 may also be prohibited for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. That is, when the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set (Y in step S251) and the prohibition period timer is not 0 (N in step S253), the processing is terminated without executing the processing in steps S261 to S266. May be.

  In this embodiment, the abnormal winning notification in the power-on prohibition period is configured such that the abnormal winning notification designation command is not transmitted during the prohibition period after power-on (steps S259 and S260 are not executed). However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormal winning designation command even during the period after the power is turned on, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is turned on. Even if an abnormal winning designation command is received in a later period, the notification process based on the abnormal winning designation command may not be executed. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 starts measurement of a prohibition period for prohibiting notification of an abnormal prize when the power is turned on (when a power-on designation command or a power failure restoration designation command is received). When the abnormal winning designation command is received within the prohibited period, the notification process based on the abnormal winning designation command is not executed.

  In the process of step S255, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Similarly, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Further, as described above, since the big hit end processing or the small hit end processing is executed for a predetermined time after the special variable winning ball device 20 is closed, the big winning immediately before the special variable winning ball device (opening / closing blade 20) is closed. The game ball won in the mouth is prevented from being detected by the count switch 23 after the value of the special symbol process flag has returned to 0, and an error is reported even though it is a regular winning. There is nothing wrong.

  Further, in the processing of step S261, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 based on the value of the normal symbol process flag, so step S363B Similar to the above process, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. In addition, as described above, as a method of delaying the timing for determining an abnormal prize from the timing for closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Is closed, and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, an abnormal winning determination is made. Therefore, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is won at the second start winning opening 14 immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the second start switch 14a after the value of the normal symbol process flag returns to 0, and an error is reported even though it is a regular winning. There is nothing.

  As described above, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, and after the predetermined time elapses after the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, You may make it perform determination. Also, in the determination of the abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method may be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20).

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 and the output state of the prize ball count signal. As shown in FIG. 79, the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 and the output state of the prize ball count signal are almost similar. The delay time of the output state of the prize ball count signal from the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 corresponds to the processing time in the payout control microcomputer 370. In this embodiment, even when a game ball is paid out based on a ball lending request from the card unit 50, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on, but the payout control microcomputer 370 is turned on. Transmits a prize ball count signal only when a prize ball is paid out based on winning.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball count signal not only when a game ball is paid out based on a winning prize but also when a game ball is paid out based on a ball lending request. You may do it. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the payout of the game ball is a payout of the game ball based on the winning, for example, based on whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is on. In addition, a count switch (award ball payout number count switch) for detecting the payout of game balls based on winning and a count switch (a ball lending payout number switch) for detecting payout of game balls based on a ball lending request are provided separately. You may do it. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball count signal based on the input of the detection signal of the prize ball payout number count switch. In addition, when a prize ball payout number count switch and a ball lending payout number count switch are provided separately, a signal line for transmitting a detection signal of the prize ball payout number count switch is branched (for example, on the payout control board 37). By branching the signal line to the main board 31, the detection signal from the prize ball payout number counting switch may be directly input to the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560). . In this case, it is not necessary to output a prize ball count signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the input port data confirmation processing in step S23B. In the input port data confirmation processing, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the data (input data) of the input port 1 (see FIG. 21) from the input port 1 (step S1581), and stores the input data of the input port 1 and the RAM. An exclusive OR is calculated for each bit with the contents of the formed input port 1 buffer (step S1582). If there is a bit with different logic (meaning “1” or “0”) between the input data of the input port 1 and the contents of the input port 1 buffer formed in the RAM, an 8-bit exclusive The operation result of the logical sum does not become 00 (H).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the result of the exclusive OR operation is 00 (H) (step S1583). If the calculation result is 00 (H), the process ends. If the calculation result is not 00 (H), the input data of the input port 1 is set to the second byte of the command buffer (step S1584). Also, FF (H) is set to the first byte of the command buffer (step S1585). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the input port data designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S1586), and executes the command setting process (step S1587). Thereby, control for transmitting the input port data designation command is performed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the input data of the input port 1 input in step S1581 in the input port 1 buffer (step S1588).

  The input data of the input port 1 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on condition that the input data of the input port 1 has been changed by the control as described above. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the input data of the input port 1 as it is as an effect control command. Therefore, even if there is a lot of information indicated by the signal input to the input port 1, the control burden on the game control means is light. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may once fetch the data of the input port 1 and store the fetched data in the input port 1 buffer each time.

  Further, since the presentation control command related to the input data of the input port 1 is output from the main board 31 on condition that the input data of the input port 1 has changed, for example, it is always 1 in a predetermined control period (period of 2 ms interval). The transmission cycle of the effect control command is difficult to grasp compared to the case where the effect control command is configured to be transmitted. That is, it becomes difficult to grasp the cycle of the predetermined control period. In the predetermined control period, the counter value for generating a random number related to the jackpot is updated one by one. Therefore, when the period of the predetermined control period is easily grasped, the timing at which the counter value becomes the predetermined value is easily grasped. Become. Predetermined timing refers to the big hit determination random number when the big hit determination random number is created by software, or when it is configured to determine whether or not to make a probable big hit based on the big hit symbol determination random number For example, the timing coincides with the determination value, the timing when the value of the jackpot symbol determination random number matches the value corresponding to the probability variation symbol, and the like. The fact that the timing at which the value of the counter reaches the predetermined value is easily grasped means that it is easy to receive fraud. In this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to receive fraud.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, a random number circuit 503 and a monitoring circuit 504 are provided outside the game control microcomputer 560, and the random number error signal is input to the game control microcomputer 560 from the outside. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not a random number error has occurred. For example, when the clock signal supplied to the random number circuit 503 is also input to the game control microcomputer 560 and the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the clock signal is interrupted, a random error has occurred. The random number error specification bit of the input port data specification command (see FIG. 40) is set to a value corresponding to the error. Also, the signal line level (high level or low level) of the random error signal from the monitoring circuit 504 is checked a plurality of times. For example, the signal line level of the random error signal becomes a level corresponding to the random error even once. Then, it may be determined that a random error has occurred. In those cases, the CPU 56 does not transmit the input data of the input port 1 as it is as an effect control command, but instead of the random number error in the second byte (EXT data) of the effect control command for the input data of the input port 1. After setting the value of the bit corresponding to the designated bit to a value corresponding to the random number error (“0” in this embodiment), it is set as an effect control command. In these cases, the CPU 56 may determine whether or not a random number error has occurred at the start of power supply, but may always determine after the start of power supply.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 transmits the input data of the input port 1 as it is as the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the CPU 56 receives a part of the input data of the input port 1 as it is. You may make it transmit, process a part, and transmit. For example, the processing may be performed after logical inversion. The logic inversion may be realized by a hardware inversion circuit. Further, as processing, for example, the bit position in one byte may be changed. The change (including shift) of the bit position may be realized by hardware wiring.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the input port data confirmation process shown in FIG. 80 by the timer interrupt process, but executes it in the main process (between steps S16 and S19 shown in FIG. 34). It may be.

  FIG. 81 is a block diagram showing various signals output to the information terminal board. As shown in FIG. 81, in this embodiment, a start port 1 signal, a start port 2 signal, a symbol determination number signal are sent from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34. The jackpot signal, the jackpot signal, the short time signal, the probability variation signal, and the prize ball information signal (prize ball signal) are output by the information output process (step S30). As described above, a door opening signal is also output from the backup power supply circuit 506 mounted on the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34.

  The symbol determination number signal is a signal for notifying the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the starting port 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14, The starting port 2 signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 13. The jackpot 1 signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot game or the jackpot game (during the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus), and the jackpot 2 signal is a jackpot game of 15 rounds or 2 rounds. It is a signal to notify that there is a signal, the time signal is a signal to notify that the special symbol variable time reduction function is in operation (during the time reduction state), and the probability fluctuation signal is a probability fluctuation signal. This is a signal for notifying that the function is in operation (in the probability changing state).

  Among these signals, the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the symbol determination number signal, the big hit 1 signal, the big hit 2 signal, the time reduction signal, and the probability variation signal are game controls executed by the game control microcomputer 560. It is a signal of control information generated during execution of processing. On the other hand, the prize ball information signal is a signal of control information generated by the game control microcomputer 560 based on a signal (prize ball count signal) output from the payout control board 37.

  FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the prize ball payout detection of the prize ball number count switch and the prize ball signal. As shown in FIG. 82, every time the number-of-payout counting switch 301 detects the passage of ten game balls at the time of paying out a prize ball (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 receives 10 pulses of the prize ball count signal). The prize ball signal (prize ball information signal) is turned on for 0.100 seconds (every time input). It should be noted that after the prize ball signal is on for 0.100 seconds, it is off for at least 0.100 seconds.

  83 to 88 are flowcharts showing the information output processing in step S30. Of the processes shown in FIGS. 83 to 88, steps S1001 to S1030 are processes for outputting the start port 1 signal, and steps S1031 to S1052 are processes for outputting the start port 2 signal. Steps S1053 to S1058 are processing for outputting the symbol determination number signal, and steps S1059 to S1071 are processing for outputting one big hit signal, two big hit signals, a short time signal, and a probability variation signal. S1108 is a process for outputting a prize ball signal (prize ball information signal).

  In the information output process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1001). Then, the address of the start port 1 information setting table is set in the pointer (step S1002), and the number of processes pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S1003). The start port 1 information setting table includes the number of processes (= 2), the start port 1 switch input bit (first start port switch input bit determination value (40 (H)), and the start port 2 switch input bit (second start port). The switch input bit determination value (80 (H)) is set In step S1003, since the pointer points to the address of the number of processes in the start port 1 information setting table, the number of processes in the start port 1 information setting table (= 2) data will be loaded.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1004), and sets the switch-on buffer to the switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), and the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the start port 1 switch input bit) is loaded into the register (step S1007), and the start port 1 switch input bit and the switch input are loaded. The logical product of the data is taken (step S1008). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 40 (H), that is, when the first start port switch 13a is on, the logical product operation result is 40 (H). When the first start port switch 13a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H).

  If the logical operation result is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1015. If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S1009), it is determined that the first start winning opening 13 has been won, and the start opening 1 information storage counter is loaded into the register (step S1010). The start port 1 information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the start port 1 signal. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1011). Then, it is confirmed whether the calculation result (added result) is not 0 (step S1012). When the calculation result is 0 (N in step S1012), 1 is subtracted from the calculation result (step S1013). Then, the calculation result is stored in the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1014).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1015), and determines whether the number of processes is not 0 (step S1015). When the number of processes is not 0 (Y in step S1015), the process proceeds to step S1004. Then, the contents of the switch-on buffer are loaded into the register (step S1004), and the switch-on buffer is set to switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the start port 2 switch input bit) is loaded into the register (step S1007), the start port 2 switch input bit and the switch input The logical product of the data is taken (step S1008). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H). Thereafter, the processes of steps S1009 to S1016 described above are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1016 that the number of processes is 0 (N in step S1016), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the start port 1 information storage timer (step S1017), and sets the start port 1 information storage timer. The state is reflected in the flag register (step S1018), and it is determined whether the start port 1 signal is being output (step S1019). The start port 1 information storage timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (an on time 200 ms and an off time 200 ms described later) of the start port 1 signal. If the value of the start port 1 information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the start port 1 signal is being output. If the value of the start port 1 information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the start port 1 signal is not being output. The

  If the start port 1 signal is being output (Y in step S1019), the process proceeds to step S1026. If the start port 1 signal is not being output (N in step S1019), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1020), and sets the status of the start port 1 information storage counter to the flag register. (Step S1021), it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal (step S1022). When the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is turned on (N in step S1009), the start port 1 information storage counter is incremented by 1, so the remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal It will be determined that there is.

  If there is no remaining number of outputs of the start port 1 signal (Y in step S1022), the process proceeds to step S1031. If there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal (N in step S1023), the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts 1 from the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1023), and the calculation result (result of subtracting 1) ) Is stored in the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1024). The winning information operating time (200) is set in the register (step S1025). The winning information operating time (200) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 200 times, that is, a time of 0.400 seconds (400 ms).

  Next, if the winning information operating time is not set in step S1025, the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts 1 from the start port 1 information storage timer, and if the winning information operating time is set in step S1025, the winning information is displayed. The operation time is decremented by 1 (step S1026). Then, the calculation result (result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the start port 1 information storage timer (step S1027).

  The game control microcomputer 560 compares the calculation result with the winning information on time (100) (step S1029), and determines whether the calculation result is shorter than the winning information on time (step S1030). The winning information ON time (100) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  If the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, if the calculation result (remaining time of the start port 1 information storage timer) is longer than the winning information on time (200 ms) (N in step S1029) The game control microcomputer 560 sets the start port 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of the output port 2 in the example shown in FIG. 20) (step S1030). When the start bit 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1110, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1111 to output the start port 1 signal. It will be output from port 2.

  When the winning of the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14 (ON of the first starting port switch 13a or the second starting port switch 14a) is generated by the processing of steps S1001 to S1030 described above, the engine is started. Mouth 1 signal is output. That is, after the start port 1 signal is turned on for 200 ms, it is turned off for 200 ms. By inputting this start port 1 signal to the hall computer, it is possible to recognize the number of winnings to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14.

  The first start when the abnormal winning (the winning to the second starting winning port 14 in the closed state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15) occurs in the second starting winning port 14 or the invalid winning (the number of reserved memories is 4) Even when the winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is generated), the starting opening 1 signal is output to the hall computer. That is, the start port 1 signal is output for all start winnings including abnormal winnings and invalid winnings.

  Since the start port 1 signal is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms, the next start is performed after the off state for 200 ms even if a start winning is continuously generated in a short time. Mouth 1 signal is output. That is, the start port 1 signal is output at an interval of at least 200 ms.

  In this way, the start port 1 signal is output for all start winnings including abnormal winnings and invalid wins, and the start port 1 signal is output with an interval of at least 200 ms. The number of all starting prizes can be ascertained reliably.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1031), reflects the state of the start port 1 switch input bit in the flag register (step S1032), and sets the switch-on buffer. It is determined whether or not the input bit of the first start port switch 13a is set, that is, whether or not the first start port switch 13a is turned on (step S1033). If the first start port switch 13a is not turned on (N in step S1033), the process proceeds to step S1039. If the first start port switch 13a is on (Y in step S1033), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the start port 2 information storage counter into the register (step S1034). The start port 2 information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the start port 2 signal. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the start port 2 information storage counter by 1 (step S1035). Then, it is confirmed whether the calculation result (added result) is not 0 (step S1036). When the calculation result is 0 (N in step S1036), 1 is subtracted from the calculation result (step S1037). Then, the calculation result is stored in the start port 2 information storage counter (step S1038).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the start port 2 information storage timer (step S1039), reflects the state of the start port 2 information storage timer in the flag register (step S1040), and outputs the start port 2 signal. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step S1041). The start port 2 information storage timer is a timer for measuring the on time and the off time of the start port 2 signal. If the value of the start port 2 information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the start port 2 signal is being output. If the value of the start port 2 information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the start port 2 signal is not being output. The

  If the start port 2 signal is being output (Y in step S1041), the process proceeds to step S1048. If the start port 2 signal is not being output (N in step S1041), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the start port 2 information storage counter (step S1042), and sets the status of the start port 2 information storage counter to the flag register. (Step S1043), it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 2 signal (step S1044). When the first start port switch 13a is turned on (Y in step S1033), the start port 2 information storage counter is incremented by 1, so that it is determined that there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 2 signal. become.

  If there is no remaining number of output times of the start port 2 signal (Y in step S1044), the process proceeds to step S1053. If there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 2 signal (N in step S1044), the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts 1 from the start port 2 information storage counter (step S1045), and the calculation result (result of subtracting 1) ) Is stored in the start port 2 information storage counter (step S1046). Then, the winning information operating time (200) is set in the register (step S1047). The winning information operating time (200) is 0.400 seconds (400 ms) as described above.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the start port 2 information storage timer by 1 if the winning information operating time is not set in step S1047, and winning information if the winning information operating time is set in step S1047. The operation time is decremented by 1 (step S1048). Then, the calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the start port 2 information storage timer (step S1049).

  The game control microcomputer 560 compares the calculation result (remaining time of the start port 2 information storage timer) with the winning information on time (100) (step S1050), and the calculation result is shorter than the winning information on time. It is determined whether or not (step S1051). The winning information on time (100) is 0.200 seconds (200 ms) as described above.

  When the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, when the calculation result (remaining time of the start port 2 information storage timer) is longer than the winning information on time (200 ms) (N in step S1051). The game control microcomputer 560 sets the start port 2 output bit position (bit 2 of the output port 2 in the example shown in FIG. 20) of the information buffer (step S1052). When the start bit 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1110, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1111, whereby the start port 2 signal is output. It will be output from port 2.

  When a winning at the first start winning opening 13 is generated by the processing of steps S1031 to S1052 described above (when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on), a start opening 2 signal is output. That is, after the start port 2 signal is turned on for 200 ms, it is turned off for 200 ms. By inputting the start port 2 signal to the hall computer, the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 13 can be recognized. As described above, since the start port 1 signal indicates the number of winnings to the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14, when the start port 1 signal and the start port 2 signal are input to the hall computer, The hall computer is the sum of the number of prizes received at the first start prize slot 13, the number of prizes received at the second start prize slot 14, the number of prizes received at the first start prize slot 13 and the number of prizes received at the second start prize slot 14. Can be recognized.

  Even when an invalid winning (a winning to the first starting winning port 13 when the number of reserved memories is 4) occurs, the starting port 2 signal is output to the hall computer. In addition, since the start port 2 signal is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms, even when the first start winning is generated in a short time, the start port 2 signal is kept off for 200 ms. Later, the next start port 2 signal is output. That is, the start port 2 signal is output at an interval of at least 200 ms.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the special symbol stop information timer into the register (step S1053), reflects the state of the special symbol stop information timer in the flag register (step S1054), and the special symbol stop information timer. Whether or not has timed out is determined (step S1055). In step S227 of the special symbol changing process (step S302), when the symbol fixed number output time is set in the special symbol stop information timer and the symbol fixed number output time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop information timer times out. When the symbol determination number output time has elapsed (when the value of the special symbol stop information timer is 0), it is determined that the special symbol stop information timer has timed out.

  If the special symbol stop information timer has not timed out (N in step S1055), the special symbol stop information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1056), and the calculation result is stored in the special symbol stop information timer (step S1057). Then, the design buffer count 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of output port 2 in the example shown in FIG. 20) is set (step S1058). When the symbol determination number 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1110, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1111. Output from the output port 2 (becomes ON state). If the special symbol stop information timer times out (Y in step S1055), the process of step S1058 is not executed, and as a result, the symbol determination number signal is turned off.

  By the processing of steps S1053 to S1058 described above, every time the change of the special symbol is stopped (stopped symbol is fixed), the symbol determination frequency signal is turned on in the symbol determination frequency output time (for example, 500 ms).

  Even if an abnormal winning is generated at the second start winning opening 14, the start opening 1 signal is output to the hall computer via the information terminal board 34. When a winning occurs, N is obtained in step S316 of FIG. 41, and the start winning itself is invalidated. Therefore, the variation of the symbol based on the abnormal winning is not started, and as a result, the symbol determination number signal based on the abnormal winning is also generated in the hall computer. Is not output. Therefore, the symbol determination number signal suitable for the variable display control actually performed can be output to the hall computer.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1059), and compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“4”) (step S1060). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 (step S1061). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 (Y in step S1061), the process proceeds to step S1065. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (N in step S1061), the position of one output bit in the information buffer jackpot is set (step S1062). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 8 (step S1063). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 8 or more (N in step S1063), the process proceeds to step S1065. When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 8 (Y in step S1063), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the 2 output bit position of the big hit in the information buffer (step S1064). When the big output 1 bit position and the big 2 output bit position of the information buffer are set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1110, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in the step S1111. One signal and two jackpot signals are output from the output port 2 (become turned on).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol high probability check process for confirming whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S1065), and determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S1066). . If the state is a high probability state (Y in step S1066), the probability variation output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1067). When the probability variation output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1110, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1111. Is output (becomes ON state).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a time reduction check process for confirming whether or not it is in the time reduction state (step S1068), and determines whether or not it is in the time reduction state (step S1069). If the time is short (Y in step S1069), the time buffer output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1071). When the time-short output bit position is set, a time-short signal is output from the output port 2 by setting the information buffer to the output value in step S1110 and outputting the output value to the output port 2 in step S1111. (Turns on)

  By the processing of steps S1059 to S1071 described above, one jackpot signal, two jackpot signals, a probability variation signal, and a short time signal corresponding to the jackpot type and gaming state are output (turned on).

  The hall computer inputs 1 signal of big hit and 2 signals of big hit, and can recognize whether a big hit of 15 rounds or a big hit of 2 rounds (sudden probability big hit or small hit) has occurred by these signals. Specifically, when one jackpot signal is on and two jackpot signals are on (when any jackpot signal is on), it can be determined that 15 rounds of jackpot have occurred, When the big hit 1 signal is in the on state and the big hit 2 signal is in the off state, it can be determined that two rounds of big hit (suddenly probable big hit) or small hits have occurred. It should be noted that a big hit signal (for example, three big hit signals) different from the big hit one signal and the big hit two signals may be output to the hall computer so that it can be discriminated whether a sudden big odd hit or a small hit has occurred. Good.

  In addition, the hall computer can input a probability variation signal and a short time signal, and can grasp the gaming state based on these signals. Specifically, when the probability variation signal is on and the time reduction signal is off, it can be determined that the gaming state is a probability variation state, the probability variation signal is on, and the time reduction signal is also When it is in the on state, it can be determined that the gaming state is a short state at the time of probability change. When the probability variation signal is in the off state and the time reduction signal is also in the off state, it can be determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  The definition of the above signals (contents that are meant when the signal is in an on state) is an example, and different definitions may be used as long as the difference in jackpot type or gaming state can be recognized in the hall computer. Further, the number and types of signals are not limited to those described above.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the prize ball payout number counter in the pointer (step S1085). The prize ball payout number counter is a counter that counts the pulses of the prize ball count signal from the payout control microcomputer 370. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the bit data of the prize ball count signal of the input port 1 (step S1086). Then, a prize ball count signal timer is loaded (step S1087A). The prize ball count signal timer is a timer for determining the time during which the prize ball count signal is on.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the bit data of the prize ball count signal is “1” (step S1087B). If it is “1”, the prize ball count signal timer is incremented by one. (Step S1087C) If it is not “1” (“0”), the prize ball count signal timer is cleared to 0 (Step S1087D). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 compares the prize ball count signal timer with the switch-on determination value (2) (step S1088), and whether the value of the prize ball count signal timer matches the switch-on determination value (2). It is determined whether or not (step S1089). If the value of the prize ball count signal timer does not match the switch-on determination value (2) (Y in step S1089), the process proceeds to step S1095. If they match (N in step S1089), it is determined that a prize ball count signal has been input (determined that a prize ball count signal has been input continuously for 4 ms), and the prize ball payout number counter is incremented by one. (Step S1090). Note that the processing of steps S1087 to S1088 is processing for confirming that the winning ball count signal has been input reliably, but the payout control microcomputer 370 also reliably performs processing similar to that of steps S1087 to S1088. You may make it confirm that the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 was input.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball payout number counter is 10 (step S1091). If the value of the winning ball payout number counter is not 10 (N in step S1091), the process proceeds to step S1095. If the value of the winning ball payout number counter is 10 (Y in step S1091), the clear data is stored in the winning ball payout number counter (step S1092). Thereby, the prize ball payout number counter is cleared. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1093), and adds 1 to the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1094). The prize ball signal output frequency counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of prize ball signal outputs.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the prize ball signal output timer (step S1095), reflects the state of the prize ball signal output timer in the flag register (step S1096), and the prize ball signal is being output. Whether or not (step S1097). The prize ball signal output timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (on time 100 ms and off time 100 ms described later) of the prize ball signal. If the value of the prize ball signal output timer is not 0, it is determined that a prize ball signal is being output. If the value of the prize ball signal output timer is 0, it is determined that no prize ball signal is being output.

  If a prize ball signal is being output (Y in step S1097), the process proceeds to step S1106. If the prize ball signal is not being output (N in step S1097), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1098), and sets the status of the prize ball signal output number counter in the flag register. It is reflected (step S1099), and it is determined whether or not there is a remaining number of prize ball signal outputs (step S1101).

  If there is no remaining number of prize ball signals output (Y in step S1101), the process proceeds to step S1110. If there is a remaining number of prize ball signal outputs (N in step S1101), the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts 1 from the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1102), and the operation result (result of 1 subtraction). Is stored in the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1103). Then, the game information signal operation operation time (100) is set in the register (step S1104). The game information signal operating time (100) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  Next, if the game information signal operating time is not set in step S1104, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the prize ball signal output timer by 1, and if the game information signal operating time is set in step S1104, the game The information signal operating time is decremented by 1 (step S1105). Then, the calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the prize ball signal output timer (step S1106).

  The game control microcomputer 560 compares the calculation result (the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer) with the game information signal output time determination value (50) (step S1107), and the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is the game information. It is determined whether the time is shorter than the signal output time determination value (50) (step S1108). The game information signal output time determination value (50) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interrupt is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.100 seconds (100 ms).

  When the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is not shorter than the game information signal output time determination value, that is, the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is longer than the game information signal output time determination value (100 ms). In this case (N in step S1108), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the prize ball output bit position of the information buffer (bit 2 of the output port 3 in the example shown in FIG. 20) (step S1109). When the prize ball output bit position of the information buffer is set, the prize buffer signal is output from the output port 3 by setting the information buffer to the output value in step S1110 and outputting the output value to the output port 3 in step S1111. Is done.

  Through the processing of steps S1085 to S1111 described above, a prize ball signal is output to the hall computer every time the prize ball count signal is counted ten times. That is, a prize ball signal is output to the hall computer every time 10 prize balls are paid out (10 pulses per pulse). Therefore, the hall computer can recognize the number of game balls paid out by the gaming machine.

  In the information output process described above, an error signal (payout error signal, ball runout signal, full tank signal) output from the payout control microcomputer 370 is output to an external device such as a hall computer. However, these signals may also be output to an external device.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means by the payout control microcomputer 370 will be described. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 89, the output port 0 is an output port for outputting a signal of each phase supplied to the payout motor 289 by the stepping motor. The output port 1 is an output port for outputting a payout error signal, a ball out signal, a full tank signal, and a prize ball count signal to the game control microcomputer 560. The output port 2 is an output port for outputting each segment of the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED. The output port 3 is an output port for outputting a PRDY signal and an EXS signal to the card unit 50. The output ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the output ports 372a, 372b, 372c, and 372d shown in FIG.

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of input port bit assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 90, a 4-bit prize ball number signal is inputted to bits 0 to 3 of the input port 0, and a prize ball REQ from the main board 31 is inputted to bits 4, 5, 6 and 7, respectively. A signal, a power confirmation signal from the main board 31, a detection signal from the ball break switch 187, and a detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 are input. In addition, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301, the operation signal from the error release switch 375, and the detection signal of the full switch 48 are input to bits 1 to 3 of the input port 1, respectively. The VL signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal from the card unit 50 are input to bits 4 to 6 of the input port 1, respectively. A clear signal from the power supply board is input to the output port 2. Note that the input ports 0, 1, and 2 correspond to the input ports 372e and 372f shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a payout control process executed by the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 370). The payout control process is executed by a timer interrupt process based on a timer interrupt generated every 2 ms, for example. In the payout control process, the payout control CPU 371 (the payout control microcomputer 370) first performs an input determination process (step S752). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in predetermined 2 bytes of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1, the state of the input state flag is checked instead of directly checking the state of the input port. In the input determination process, the payout control CPU 371 also performs a process of transmitting the input data of the input ports 0 and 1 to the main board 31.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S754). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 31 (step S755). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing a control to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 50 and a control for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball number signal from the main board. Is executed (step S756).

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Further, the payout control CPU 371 executes display control processing for performing a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error processing (step S758).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer, and output port 3 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer, and output port 3 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S753), a prepaid card unit control process (step S754), a main control communication process (step S755), and information. It is updated in the output process (step S758) and the display control process (step S759).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing main control communication processing in step S755. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes one of steps S1531 to S1533 in accordance with the value of the main control communication control code.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a main control communication normal process (step S1531) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is zero. In the main control communication normal processing, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs processing without executing the subsequent processing when the error bit (main control unconnected error bit or prize ball REQ signal error bit) is on. Is finished (step S1541). In step S1541, if any one of the two bits in the error flag is set, it is determined that the error bit is set.

  If the BRDY signal is on, the payout control microcomputer 370 ends the process without executing the subsequent processes (step S1542). That the BRDY signal is on means that a ball lending request is generated from the card unit 50. That is, when a ball lending request is generated, communication with the game control means of the main board 31 (communication relating to prize ball payout) does not proceed.

  If the conditions of steps S1541 to S1542 are not satisfied and the power supply confirmation signal is on, the payout control CPU 371 confirms whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is on (steps S1543 and S1544). . If the prize ball number signal is on, the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number signal is added to the contents of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S1545), and the process for turning on the prize ball BUSY signal is performed. (Step S1546). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the on state. Then, the winning ball BUSY signal output time (10 in this example) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1547), the value of the main control communication control code is set to 1 (step S1548), and the process is terminated. The main control communication control timer is a timer used for monitoring the time related to communication with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. At this stage, the timing for turning off the prize ball BUSY signal is set. The award ball BUSY signal output time is set. The prize ball unpaid-out number counter is formed in a non-volatile (power-backed up in this example) RAM area.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing main control communication processing (step S1532) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 1. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the state of the prize ball REQ signal (step S1552) if the power confirmation signal is on (step S1551). If the prize ball REQ signal is off, the prize ball REQ signal error bit in the error flag is set (step S1553). This is because it is strange that the prize ball REQ signal is immediately turned off at this stage.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1554), and if not 0, subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1555) and ends the process. To do. If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, processing for turning off the prize ball BUSY signal is performed. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the OFF state (step S1556). Also, a prize ball REQ signal OFF monitoring time (24 in this example) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1557). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 2 (step S1558), and the process ends.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a main control communication end process (step S1533) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 2. In the main control communication process, if the error bit (main control unconnected error bit or prize ball REQ signal error bit) is on, the payout control microcomputer 370 proceeds to step S1567 (step S1561). . Also when the power confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S1567 (step S1562). If both error bits are off and the power confirmation signal is on, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is off (step S1563). When it is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1567.

  If the prize ball REQ signal is not turned off, the value of the main control communication control timer is confirmed (step S1564). If the value of the main control communication control timer is not 0, the value of the main control communication control timer is decremented by 1 (step S1565). If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, it is determined that the prize ball REQ signal has not been turned off within the monitoring time, and the prize ball REQ signal error bit is set in the error flag (step S1566). Transition.

  In step S1567, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 0, and the process ends.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the winning ball lending control process in step S756. In the winning ball lending control process, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (Y in step S1601). The value of the payout number counter is decremented by 1 (Y in step S1602, S1604), and if the ball is not being lent, the value of the unsold prize ball number counter is decremented by 1 (N in step S1602, S1603). Next, the payout ball detection bit of the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (step S1605). The payout ball detection bit is a game regardless of whether the payout motor 289 is driven in one payout ball payout process (up to 15 balls) or one ball lending process (25 payouts) in the payout passing waiting process. This is used to detect that no sphere has passed through the payout number counting switch 301. Thereafter, any one of steps S1610 to S1612 is executed according to the value of the payout control code.

  In the winning ball lending control process, when checking the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 or subtracting the unpaid number counter, the error bit check is not executed. Therefore, even if an error state relating to the payout of game balls is detected, every time a payout of game balls is detected by the payout number count switch 301, if the payout game balls are loaned balls, a ball rental unpaid number counter 1 is subtracted, and if it is a prize ball, a process of subtracting 1 from the prize ball unpaid number counter is executed. Therefore, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of unpaid game balls can be managed accurately. That is, a game ball paid out from the ball payout device 97 before the payout control microcomputer 370 detects the occurrence of an error is detected by the payout number count switch 301 slightly after the payout time. However, when the payout control microcomputer 370 detects the occurrence of an error after the game ball is paid out from the ball payout device 97 and before the game ball is detected by the payout number count switch 301, The game balls paid out from the ball payout device 97 before detecting the occurrence of an error can be reflected in the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the payout start waiting process (step S1610) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 does not execute the subsequent processes if an error bit (one or more of all error bits in the error flag (see FIG. 102)) is set (step S1621). . The error flag is formed in the RAM.

  On the other hand, if the BRDY signal is not in the ON state, the process for paying out a prize ball after step S1631 is executed. If the BRDY signal is on and the BRQ signal, which is a ball lending request signal, is on, a ball lending operation flag is set (steps S1623 and S1624). Then, “25” is set in the unpaid ball lending number counter (step S1625), and “25” is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S1626).

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  Thereafter, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the payout motor start preparation process in the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process. (Step S1627), the value of the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1628), and the process is terminated.

  In the payout motor control processing, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs payout motor normal processing (processing such as setting a pointer at the head address of a table stored in the ROM) according to the value of the payout motor control code. , Dispensing motor start preparation processing (processing such as setting the initial value of the excitation pattern in bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), dispensing motor slow-up processing (smoothing the dispensing motor 289) In order to start rotation, the content of the payout motor excitation pattern table is read out at an interval longer than that in the case of constant speed processing and gradually approaching the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. Processing for setting bits 4 to 7 in the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of 0), dispensing motor constant speed processing (periodic) The process of reading out the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table and setting the bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), the payout motor brake process (sending the payout motor 289 smoothly) Therefore, the output state of the output port 0 is read out by reading the content of the dispensing motor excitation pattern table at a longer interval than in the case of constant speed processing and at a time interval gradually moving away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. And processing of setting to bits 4 to 7 of output port 0 buffer corresponding to 1), and ball motor payout motor brake processing (in the case of rotation for releasing ball biting, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read out) The process of setting bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0) To.

  In step S1631, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether or not the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is 0 (step S1631). If 0, the process ends. The award ball unpaid-out counter is a value other than 0 when the communication related to the payout command signal is normally completed with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 in the main control communication end process. The number indicated by the prize ball number signal) is added. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether it is 15 or more (step S1632). If it is less than 15, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S1633), and if it is 15 or more, “15” is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S1634). . Then, a winning ball moving flag is set (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1627.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a payout motor stop waiting process (step S1611) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S1641).

  When the payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control monitoring timer (step S1642). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. Then, the value of the payout control code is set to 2 (step S1643), and the process ends.

  99 to 101 are flowcharts showing a payout passing waiting process (step S1612) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, when a prize ball is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball is tried up to 2 times. In the re-payout operation, when it is detected by the payout number count switch 301 that the game ball is actually paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally. In this embodiment, the maximum number of game balls to be paid out in one prize ball payout operation is 15, and if the prize ball number signal is received during the prize ball payout, the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is received. Therefore, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0.

  Further, when the ball lending is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the ball lending unpaid-out counter is 0. If the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, and if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball or the remaining number of ball lending (corresponding to the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter) Try. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out in one ball lending and payout operation is 25 (fixed value), and the payout motor 289 is rotated so that 25 game balls are paid out. Therefore, when the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  In the payout passing waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370 first checks the value of the payout control timer, and if the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S1653 (step S1650). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S1651). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S1652), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. Note that the process in step S1650 is a process that takes into consideration the fact that a retry operation for game ball payout, which will be described later, is started. When the process of step S3007 to be described later is executed, a retry operation is started through a route from step S1650 to S1653.

  If the payout control timer has timed out (step S1652), it is confirmed whether or not a ball lending payout process (ball lending operation) has been executed (step S1653). Whether or not the ball lending operation has been executed is confirmed by whether or not the ball lending operation bit in the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (see steps S1623 and S1624). When the ball lending operation is not executed, that is, when the prize ball payout process (prize ball operation) is executed, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the value of the award ball unpaid number counter ( Step S1654). When the value of the winning ball unpaid-out counter is 0, it is determined that the winning ball payout process has been completed normally, and the payout ball detection bit in the payout control state flag, 1 bit during re-payout operation, and during re-payout operation 2 bits, the winning ball operating flag and the ball lending operating bit are reset (step S1655), the payout control code is set to 0 (step S1656), and the processing is terminated. This bit is set when the switch 301 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number counting switch 301 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. Further, 1 bit during the re-payout operation and 2 bits during the re-payout operation are control bits used when executing a re-payout process including two re-payout operations.

  If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, the payout control microcomputer 370 indicates an error flag (specifically, 1 bit for a payout switch error, 2 bits for a payout switch error, and a payout case). Re-payout operation on condition that any one or a plurality of error bits) is not set (step S1659), and on the condition that payout ball detection bit is not set (step S1661) Execute. If the error flag is set, the re-payout operation is not executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid prize ball number counter may not be 0. Therefore, if the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the prize ball payout process, it is assumed that the prize ball payout process is normally completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1655. For example, when 15 game balls should be paid out in one prize ball payout process, when only 14 game balls are actually paid out (the number of payout count switch 301 is 14 game balls). In this case, the payout ball detection bit is set, so it is considered that the award ball payout process has been completed normally. It should not have been done, and the shortage will be paid out in the next prize ball payout process, so there will be no disadvantage to the player.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control microcomputer 370 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1662). If not set, it is checked whether 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1663). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1664), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S1665). ), The value of the re-payout operation number or ball lending unpaid-out number counter is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S1666). The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer. In step S1666, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is also handled because step S1666 is used in the re-payout process in the lend-out process. That is, in step S1666, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the re-payout operation number in the re-payout process in the winning ball payout process, and sets the value of the unpaid-out number counter in the ball lend in the re-payout process in the ball lending payout process. set. Thereafter, the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1667), and the process is terminated.

  When it is confirmed in step S1663 that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets 1 as the number of re-payout operations in order to execute the second re-payout (step S1663). In step S1668, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S1669), and 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation (step S1670). Then, control goes to a step S1666.

  If it is confirmed in step S1662 that 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 does not pay out the game ball even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the number of payouts). Assuming that the count switch 301 has not detected a game ball), the payout case error bit in the error flag is set (step S1672). At that time, 2 bits are reset during the re-payout operation (step S1671). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if no game balls are paid out even if two re-payout operations are performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process), it is determined that the game ball payout operation is defective and the payout number count switch is not A passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the payout control microcomputer 370 detects that the game ball has not been paid out based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 as the payout detection means, Control is performed so that the payout means pays out one game ball up to a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice) as a limit. In this embodiment, if the game ball is not paid out even if the retry operation for paying out the game ball is performed twice, the payout case error bit is set and an error is being generated. (Step S1672), the payout case error bit may be set when it is detected for the first time that the game ball has not been paid out. Note that “retry operation (or“ retry ”,“ retry operation processing ”) means that the actual number of payouts is equal to the number of game balls paid out in spite of execution of a normal payout process. This is an operation to be executed when the amount is small, and means an operation for executing the payout process again in order to pay out unpaid game balls separately from the normal payout process.

  In the prize ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one prize ball payout or one ball lending). The payout start shown in FIG. Only in the waiting process. In the payout motor stop waiting process shown in FIG. 98 and the payout passing wait process shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the error bit is not checked. Note that the error bit is also checked in step S1659 and the like in the payout passing waiting process, but this check is for determining whether or not a re-payout operation is performed, and is a payout operation (single prize ball payout or 1 This is not to determine whether or not to start ball lending. Therefore, after the process of step S1626, S1633 or step S1634 is performed and the game ball payout process is started, the payout process is not interrupted even if an error occurs. In other words, when an error occurs, the game ball payout process is continued until a point at which the game ball can be cut well (at the time when one prize ball payout or one ball lending ends). The error bits in the error flag checked in step S1621 include an error bit indicating that the power supply confirmation signal from the main board 31 has been turned off. Therefore, even when the power supply confirmation signal is turned off, the game ball payout process is stopped at a time when the turn is good.

  When it is confirmed in step S1653 that the ball lending / dispensing process (ball lending operation) has been executed, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms whether or not the value of the lending / unpaid number counter is 0 (step). S1657). If it is 0, it is determined that the ball lending / dispensing process is normally completed, and the process proceeds to step S1655.

  In step S1657, if the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, an error flag (specifically, any one of the payout switch error error 1 bit, the payout switch error error 2 bit, and the payout case error bit) Or one bit or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S1675), and the re-payout process is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout process is not executed.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control microcomputer 370 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1676). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1677). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1678), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S1679). ) After further resetting the payout ball detection bit (step S1680), the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1677, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs a process for executing the re-payout operation again. Specifically, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S1681). If the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the game ball is paid out in the first re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S1683. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, the process proceeds to step S1684 to execute the second re-payout operation.

  In step S1683, the payout ball detection bit is reset, and then the process proceeds to step S1666. Therefore, in this case, since 1 bit remains set during the re-payout operation, the first (first) re-payout operation is performed again. In step S1684, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations (step S1684), 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1684), and the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1676, when it is confirmed that 2 bits during the re-payout operation are set, the payout control microcomputer 370 resets 2 bits during the re-payout operation (step S1686), and the payout ball detection bit is set. In other words, if the game ball has been paid out by the re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S1683 and an attempt is made to eliminate the remaining unpaid portion. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, it is determined that the game ball has not been paid out even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the payout number count switch 301 has not detected a game ball). A payout case error bit is set (step S1688). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if one game ball is not paid out even if two re-payout operations are continuously performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process) related to the ball lending process, a game ball payout operation is performed. As a failure, a payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set. In this embodiment, the ball lending control process is executed with priority over the prize ball control process (the process after step S1631) (see step S1622), but the prize ball control process is performed over the ball lending control process. Priority may be given to execution.

  Next, error processing will be described. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the type of error and the display of the LED 374 for error display. In this embodiment, the numerical value displayed on the error display LED 374 is the same as the corresponding bit of the error flag. For example, the display of “0” corresponds to bit 0 of the error flag. As shown in FIG. 102, when disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or ball clogging at the payout number count switch 301 is detected, the error display LED 374 is set to “0” as a payout switch abnormality detection error 1. Control the display. The detection of the disconnection of the payout count switch 301 or the clogging of the balls in the payout count switch 301 is determined by the detection signal of the payout count switch 301 not being turned off.

  When the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on even though the game ball is not paying out, a control is performed to display “1” on the error display LED 374 as a payout switch abnormality detection error 2. Do. If the detection signal of the payout count switch 301 does not turn on despite the rotation abnormality of the payout motor 289 or the game ball being paid out, “2” is displayed on the error display LED 374 as a payout case error. Control. When the prize ball REQ signal is turned on at an improper timing, or when the prize ball REQ signal is turned off at an improper timing, “3” is displayed in the error display LED 374 as a prize ball REQ signal error. Control to display. It is detected in the main control communication process that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on or off at an incorrect timing.

  Further, when the lower pan is full, that is, when the full switch 48 is turned on, a control is performed to display “4” on the error display LED 374 as a full error. When the supply ball is insufficient, that is, when the ball break switch 187 is turned on, control is performed to display “5” on the error display LED 374 as a ball break error.

  Further, when the VL signal from the card unit 50 is turned off, control is performed to display “6” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit unconnected error. When communication with the card unit 50 is performed at an incorrect timing, control is performed to display “7” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit communication error. The prepaid card unit communication error is detected in the prepaid card unit control process (step S754).

  Among the above errors, after the occurrence of a payout switch abnormality detection error 2, a payout case error or a prize ball REQ signal error, the error release switch 375 is operated and an operation signal is output from the error release switch 375 (becomes turned on). The payout control means returns to the state before the error occurred.

  103 and 104 are flowcharts showing the error processing in step S757. In the error processing, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks the error flag, and the set bits are only the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the prize ball REQ signal error (any one of the three). Whether or not only those bits, or only two of the three bits, or only those three bits) is checked (step S3001). If these are the only bits that are set, it is checked whether or not the operation signal is turned on from the error release switch 375 (step S3002). When the operation signal is turned on, the error recovery time is set in the pre-error recovery timer (step S3003). The error recovery time is the time from when the error release switch 375 is operated until the actual return from the error state to the normal state.

  If the operation signal from the error release switch 375 is not on, the value of the timer before error recovery is confirmed (step S3004). If the value of the timer before error recovery is 0, that is, if the timer before error recovery is not set, the process proceeds to step S3008. If the pre-error return timer is set, the value of the pre-error return timer is decremented by -1 (step S3005). If the pre-error return timer value becomes 0 (step S3006), the payout switch of the error flags Bits of abnormality detection error 2, payout case error and prize ball REQ signal error are reset (step S3007), and the process proceeds to step S3008.

  When the processing of step S3007 is executed, there may be an error bit that is not in the set state among the bits of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the prize ball REQ signal error. There is no problem resetting error bits that are not in the state. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error (see FIG. 102) that causes the setting of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, or the winning ball REQ signal error bit occurs, an error occurs. The error is released when the release switch 375 is pressed.

  When the process of step S3007 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control code is “2” (corresponding to the execution of the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 99 to 101), and the prize ball When the value of the unpaid-out number counter or the value of the ball-lending unpaid-out number counter is not 0, a retry operation for game ball payout is started. That is, when the award ball lending control process of step S756 is executed next, when the payout passing waiting process of step S1612 is executed, the repayment process is performed again. For example, if the prize ball payout process has been performed and the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is not 0, the process proceeds from step S1654 to step S1659, and it is confirmed in step S1659 that the error bit is in the reset state. Therefore, the process for starting the re-payout process after step S1662 is executed again, and the re-payout process is executed. In addition, regarding the payout case error bit reset by pressing the error release switch 375, when the bit is set (when step S1672 is executed), the payout control timer has already expired. Therefore, when the process of step S3007 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control timer = 0 is determined in the determination of step S1650 when the payout passage waiting process is executed next. Further, when the payout case error bit is set, the payout ball detection bit is 0 (since step S1672 is not executed unless the payout ball detection bit is 0 as determined in step S1661). Therefore, if it is confirmed in step S1659 that the error bit is in the reset state, step S1662 is always executed. That is, the re-payout process is always executed.

  As described above, the payout control microcomputer 370 pays out a game ball when the payout number count switch 301 detects no game ball even though the ball payout device 97 pays out a game ball. After performing the correct payout control for causing the ball payout device 97 to execute a retry operation for taking out a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) as a limit, the payout number count switch 301 does not detect any game balls. Is detected (see step S1661 onward in FIG. 100), the control state related to payout is shifted to the error state, and again on condition that an error release signal is output from the error release switch 375 in the error state. A correction payout control restart process for performing the correction payout control is executed.

  Further, even during re-payout processing in an error state (specifically, during re-payout processing before setting a payout case error and during re-payout processing after the error release switch 375 is pressed), steps S1601 to S1601 shown in FIG. The process of S1604 is executed. That is, even when an error relating to payout occurs, if the game ball passes the payout number count switch 301, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter is subtracted. Therefore, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter when returning from the error state is a value reflecting the number of game balls actually paid out. That is, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of game balls actually paid out can be accurately managed.

  Further, in the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, even when it is confirmed that the game ball has been paid out as a result of the re-payout process, the payout case error bit is not reset. The bit of the payout case error is reset only when the error release switch 375 is operated (specifically, when an error return time after operation elapses) (steps S3002, S3003, S3007). That is, the payout case error (payout shortage error) state is not automatically canceled based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the payout number count switch 301, etc., and the payout case does not go through human operation. The error is not cleared. Therefore, the game store clerk and the like can surely recognize that a shortage of payout has occurred.

  In step S3008, the dispensing control microcomputer 370 confirms the detection signal of the full tank switch 48. If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output (if it is in the ON state), the full tank error bit in the error flag is set (step S3009). If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is in the OFF state, the full tank error bit is reset (step S3010).

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 (step S3011). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output (if it is in the ON state), the ball break error bit in the error flag is set (step S3012). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is OFF, the ball break error bit is reset (step S3013).

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the value of the switch timer in which the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is set, and if the value exceeds the maximum switch-on time (eg, “240”) ( In step S3018), the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 in the error flag is set (step S3019).

  The switch timer is a counter that is updated in the input determination process in step S752. If the value of the switch timer is equal to or shorter than the maximum switch-on time, the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 bit is reset (step S3020). It should be noted that the value of the switch timer is incremented by 1 when the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is switched on in the input determination process at step S752, and is cleared by 0 when it is off. . Accordingly, the fact that the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 exceeds the switch on maximum time means that the payout number count switch 301 is in the on state exceeding the switch on maximum time. Then, it is determined that the game ball is clogged at the disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or at the portion of the payout number count switch 301.

  In addition, when the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 becomes a switch-on determination value (for example, “2”) (step S3021), the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the ball lending operation flag and the award. If both the ball operation flags are in the reset state, the game ball passes through the payout number count switch 301 even though the payout operation is not in progress, and the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is set in the error flag (step S3022). S3023). If the ball lending operation flag or the winning ball operation flag is set, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is reset (step S3024).

  Furthermore, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the input state of the VL signal from the card unit 50 (step S3025). The unit unconnected error bit is set (step S3026). If the VL signal is input (if the VL signal is on), the prepaid card unit unconnected error bit is reset (step S3027).

  In this embodiment, the error display LED 374 mounted on the payout control board 37 installed on the back of the gaming machine is notified that an error relating to payout has occurred. It is notified by the lamp installed on the front side.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a process of a part of the input determination process in step S752 that transmits the input data of the input ports 0 and 1 (see FIG. 90) to the main board 31. In the input determination process, the payout control microcomputer 370 reads the input data of the input port 0 (step S3031). Then, the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 in the input data is output to the bit of the ball break signal of the output port 1 (see FIG. 89) (step S3032). Further, input data of the input port 1 is read (step S3033). Then, the detection signal of the full switch 48 in the input data is output to the bit of the full port signal of the output port 1 (step S3034).

  Furthermore, when the prize ball operating flag is set (step S3035), the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 in the input data is output to the bit of the prize ball count signal of the output port 1 (step S3036). . If any one of bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 of the error flag (see FIG. 102) is set, the bit of the payout error signal of the output port 1 is set to “1” ( Steps S3037 and S3038). If none of the error flag bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 is set, the bit of the payout error signal of the output port 1 is set to “0” (steps S3037 and S3039). Since the output port generally maintains the output until different data is output from the CPU side, the output state of the bits of the payout error signal is maintained until the process of step S3039 is executed after the process of step S3038 is executed. It is maintained at “1”, and the output state of the bits of the payout error signal is maintained at “0” after the process of step S3039 is executed until the process of step S3038 is executed.

  That is, when the payout error signal is output (turned on), one of errors corresponding to bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 of the error flag shown in FIG. 102 has occurred. Means.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706). In addition, a notification control process for performing notification of a plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine is performed using an effect device such as the variable display device 9 (step S707). Furthermore, the serial input / output process which outputs the data set by the command analysis process, the effect control process process, and the notification control process process to the serial output circuit 353, and reads the data received from the input ICs 620 and 621 from the serial input circuit 354. Is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  For example, when the serial input circuit 102 receives serial data corresponding to the number of stages (bits) of its own circuit, the serial input circuit 102 outputs a reception completion signal to the effect control CPU 101. The reception completion signal is input to the interrupt terminal of the CPU 101 for effect control, for example. The effect control CPU 101 inputs data from the serial input circuit 102 via the input port 103 in an interrupt process started based on the reception completion signal being input to the interrupt terminal. Then, the input data is stored in the reception command buffer indicated by the command reception number counter in the command reception buffer, and the value of the command reception number counter is incremented by one. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 38 and 39) the effect control command stored in the command reception buffer is.

  108 to 112 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing (step S704) in the main processing. The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612).

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the received production control command is a power-on designation command or a power failure restoration designation command (step S613A). If it is a power-on designation command or a power failure recovery designation command (Y in step S613A), the process proceeds to step S617. If it is not a power-on designation command or a power failure restoration designation command (N in step S613A), the received effect control command is an input port data designation command on condition that the random number error checked flag is not set (step S613B). It is confirmed whether or not there is (that is, the MODE data is FF (H)) and the random number error designation bit in the EXT data is “0” (step S614). If it is “0”, that is, if a random error has been detected (see FIG. 21), a random error flag is set (step S615). Further, a random number error checked flag is set (step S616). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S617. Whether or not the received effect control command is the input port data specifying command and the random number error specifying bit in the EXT data is “0” by the processing of steps S613A, S613B, S614, and S616 is The control microcomputer 100 is executed only once after the operation starts. The effect control command other than the power-on designation command or the power failure restoration designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560 first is the input port data designation command, and the random error designation bit in the EXT data is “0”. The random error flag is set only if

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the variable display device 9 (Y in step S617), the effect control microcomputer 100 is used. Confirms the gaming state based on the content of the background designation command, and sets the confirmed gaming state in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S618). And control which displays the background image according to a game state on the variable display apparatus 9 is performed (step S619).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 800F (H)) for designating a variation pattern (step S620), the effect control microcomputer 100 will execute the EXT of the command. Data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S621), and a fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S622). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (step S623), and the variation pattern for both common big hit / probable variation big hit. If it is not the variation pattern command for designating (N in step S623), the first decorative symbol determination process is executed (step S624). The first decorative symbol determination process is to stop the decorative symbol based on a variation pattern command that designates a variation pattern other than the regular big hit / probable variation big hit variation pattern (a special variation pattern such as a variation pattern that designates a loss). This is a process of determining a symbol. If the variation pattern command specifies a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (Y in step S623), a common flag indicating that the variation pattern is for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit is set (step S625).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (symbol information specifying command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) for specifying symbol information (Y in step S626), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the symbol information. A symbol information command reception flag indicating that the information designation command has been received is set (step S627). The symbol information command reception flag is reset at the end of symbol variation, at the end of a big hit or at the end of a small hit (see steps S867, S974, S987). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined in the first decorative symbol determination process (step S628). Here, when the variation pattern command is not a command for designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable big hit, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined in the first decorative symbol determination process. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined depending on whether or not the dual-purpose flag is set.

  If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in Step S628), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the second decorative symbol determination process (Step S629). In the second decorative symbol determination process, when a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot is received, based on the symbol information designation command, a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol is used as a decoration symbol stop symbol. It is a process to determine.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect (step S630). Here, since the symbol information designation command also specifies whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed after the start of the big hit game as the jackpot type, the necessity of executing the re-lottery effect is confirmed by the content of the symbol information designation command. Can do. When it is necessary to execute a re-lottery effect (Y in step S630), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a post-re-lottery stop symbol determination process (step S631). The stop symbol after re-lottery means a stop symbol (probability variable symbol in this embodiment) that is stopped and displayed (derived display) after the re-lottery effect is executed. A stop symbol that is stopped and displayed before the re-lottery effect is executed (in this embodiment, a non-probable variable symbol) may be referred to as a temporary stop symbol.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command: C0XX (H)) that designates the starting winning memory number (step S632), the start winning memory display control process is executed (step S633). . The start winning memory display control process is a process for performing a control for displaying a display (start winning memory display) that can specify the start winning memory number in a predetermined area of the variable display device 9. In this process, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the number of start winning memories based on the start winning memory designation command, and displays the confirmed number of start winning memories on the variable display device 9.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (fanfare command: A000 (H) to A004 (H), A600 (H)) for designating a big hit or a small hit (fanfare) (Y in step S635). The production control microcomputer 100 sets a fanfare reception flag corresponding to the content of the fanfare command (step S636). For example, depending on the contents of the fanfare command (such as the type of jackpot), a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a normal jackpot, a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a promiscuous jackpot (no re-lottering effect), a probability variable jackpot (re-lottery effect during a jackpot) Fanfare reception flag indicating the start of execution), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of probability variation big hit (execution of re-draw lottery with ending), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of sudden probability variation big hit, fanfare reception flag indicating the start of small hit To do.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (ending command: A301 (H) to A305 (H)) for designating the end of the jackpot (ending) (Y in step S637), the effect control microcomputer 100 is The ending reception flag corresponding to the content of the ending command is set (step S638). For example, depending on the content of the ending command (such as jackpot type), an ending reception flag indicating the end of a normal jackpot, an ending reception flag indicating the end of a promiscuous jackpot (no redrawing effect), a promising big hit (redrawing effect during a jackpot) An ending reception flag indicating the end of execution), an ending reception flag indicating the end of probability variation jackpot (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and an ending reception flag indicating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command: 9000 (H)) (Y in step S639), the production control microcomputer 100 is an initial indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control to display the screen on the variable display device 9 is performed (step S640). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined decorative symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (9200 (H)) (Y in step S642), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a predetermined power failure recovery screen (the game state continues). (Screen displaying information for informing the player that the player is in the game) is controlled (step S643). Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize notification designation command (D000 (H)) (step S645), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the MODE data of the received effect control command is FF (H), that is, if an input port data designation command is received (Y in step S647), the processing in steps S648A to S669 is performed.

  First, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a first door opening / closing confirmation process for confirming opening / closing of the glass door frame 2 based on the received input port data designation command (step S648A).

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the first door opening / closing confirmation process. In the first door opening / closing confirmation process, the production control microcomputer 100 is a first door closed state flag that is an internal flag (in a state where the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the glass door frame 2 is closed). It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that there is) is set (step S685). When the first door closed state flag is not set, the EXT data of the input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but the data in that register when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) It is confirmed whether or not the door opening 1 error designation bit is “1” (corresponding to closing, see FIG. 21) (step S686). When the door opening 1 error designation bit is “1”, the first door closing state flag is set (step S687).

  If the door closed state flag is set (Y in step S685), it is confirmed whether the door opening 1 error specifying bit in the EXT data of the input port data specifying command is “0” (corresponding to opening). (Step S688). When the door opening 1 error designation bit is “0”, the first door closing state flag is reset (step S689).

  With the above processing, when the first door closed state flag is set and the input port data specifying command whose door open 1 error specifying bit is “0” is received, the first door closed state flag is reset. Further, when the first door closed state flag is not set and the input port data specifying command whose door open 1 error specifying bit is “1” is received, the first door closed state flag is set. When the input port data designation command is transmitted every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) (in the input port data confirmation processing shown in FIG. 80, the input port data is changed from “0” to “1”. Or the input port data designation command is transmitted when it changes from “1” to “0”.), The input port data designation command whose door opening 1 error designation bit is “0” is continued for a predetermined period. When received, the first door closed state flag is reset, and when the input port data designation command whose door opening 1 error designation bit is “1” is continuously received for a predetermined period, the first door closed state flag is set. You may make it set. In this case, the first door closing state flag set / reset state change is prevented from being temporarily repeated. As a result, the first door opening error notification flag set / reset state change is temporarily repeated. It is prevented.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the first door closed state flag is set (step S648B). When the first door closing state flag is set (Y in step S648B), the production control microcomputer 100 has the first door opening error notification flag for requesting the start of the door opening error notification. If so, the first door opening error notification flag is reset (step S648C). Then, the first error notification release flag is set (step S648D). Then, the process proceeds to step S650A.

  In step S648B, when the first door closed state flag is not set (N in step S648B), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the first door opening error notification flag (step S648E). Then, the process proceeds to step S650A.

  In step S650A, the production control microcomputer 100 executes second door opening / closing confirmation processing for confirming opening / closing of the game frame 11 based on the received input port data designation command (step S650A). In the second door opening / closing confirmation process, the same process as the first door opening / closing confirmation process described above is performed. That is, in the second door opening / closing confirmation process, “first” in the first door opening / closing confirmation process shown in FIG. 113 is read as “second”, and “door opening error 1 designation” is changed to “door opening error 2 designation”. The read processing is executed. Here, the second door closed state flag is a flag indicating that the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the game frame 11 is closed.

  Similar to the first door opening / closing confirmation process, in the second door opening / closing confirmation process, when the second door closed state flag is set, an input port data designation command whose door opening 2 error designation bit is “0” is issued. If received, the second door closed state flag is reset. Further, when the second door closed state flag is not set and the input port data designation command having the door open 2 error designation bit “1” is received, the second door closed state flag is set.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the second door closed state flag is set (step S650B). When the second door closed state flag is set (Y in step S650B), the production control microcomputer 100 has the second door open error notification flag for requesting the start of the door open error notification. If so, the second door opening error notification flag is reset (step S650C). Then, the second error notification release flag is set (step S650D). Then, the process proceeds to step S651.

  In step S650B, when the second door closed state flag is not set (N in step S650B), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the second door opening error notification flag (step S650E). Then, the process proceeds to step S651.

  In step S651, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the payout error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “1” to “0” (step S651). When it is changed to “0”, that is, when the cancellation of the payout error is detected (see FIG. 21), the payout error notification flag is reset, the error notification release flag is set (step S652), and the process proceeds to step S667. To do. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. It is determined whether or not the payout error bit has changed by comparing the EXT data of the input port data specifying command stored in the storage area (EXT data of the input port data specifying command received last time).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the payout error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “0” to “1” (step S653), and from “0” to “1”. When a change is made, that is, when a payout error is detected, a payout error notification flag is set to request the start of payout error notification (step S654), and the process proceeds to step S667.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the ball break error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “1” to “0” (step S655). When it is changed to “0”, that is, when release of the ball break error is detected (see FIG. 21), the ball break error notification flag is reset, the error notification release flag is set (step S656), and the process proceeds to step S667. Transition. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. By comparing the EXT data of the input port data specifying command stored in the storage area (EXT data of the input port data specifying command received last time), it is determined whether or not the ball break error bit has changed.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the ball break error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “0” to “1” (step S657). When it is changed to “1”, that is, when a ball-out error is detected, a ball-out error notification flag is set to request the start of ball-out error notification (step S658), and the process proceeds to step S667.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the full tank error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “1” to “0” (step S659), and “1” to “0”. "", That is, when the release of the full tank error is detected (see FIG. 21), the full tank error notification flag is reset, the error notification release flag is set (step S660), and the process proceeds to step S667. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. It is determined whether or not the full error bit has changed by comparing the EXT data of the input port data designation command saved in the save area (EXT data of the input port data designation command received last time).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the full tank error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “0” to “1” (step S661), and from “0” to “1”. When a full tank error is detected, a full tank error notification flag is set to request the start of full tank error notification (step S662), and the process proceeds to step S667.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a prize ball payout notification flag indicating that the prize ball payout notification is being executed is set (step S663). If the prize ball payout notification flag is not set (N in step S663), it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball count designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “0” to “1”. (Step S 664), when “0” is changed to “1”, that is, when the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (Y in Step S 664), the award is issued to request the start of the prize ball payout notification. A ball payout notification flag is set (step S665). Then, a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 1 second) is set in the prize ball count designation monitoring timer (step S666). The prize ball count designation monitoring timer is a timer for confirming whether or not the prize ball payout has ended. When the prize ball count designation monitoring timer times out, the prize ball payout notification is terminated. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. By comparing the EXT data of the input port data designation command saved in the save area (EXT data of the input port data designation command received last time), it is determined whether or not the prize ball count designation bit has changed.

  When the prize ball payout notification flag is set (Y in step S663), when the prize ball count designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command is changed from “0” to “1” (in step S668). Y) A predetermined value is reset in the prize ball count designation monitoring timer (step S669). When the payout number count switch 301 is continuously turned on by the processing of steps S668 and S669, the prize ball count designation monitoring timer does not time out.

  In step S667, the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (FFYY (H)) (stored in the command reception buffer, but transferred to the register from the command reception buffer) is the next data. When the input port data designation command is received, the data is stored in the EXT data storage area of the RAM for use as the EXT data of the previously received input port data designation command. In the initialization process in step S701, the contents of the EXT data storage area are initialized to 70 (H). 70 (H) corresponds to the case where each error signal and the prize ball count signal are in the OFF state (see input port 0 in FIG. 21). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  If it is confirmed in step S647 that the MODE data of the effect control command is not FF (H) (N in step S647), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command. Set (step S649). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set in step S622 in the command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and to derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol) in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Also, when a fanfare command designating sudden start of a probable big hit is received, a two-round effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is open is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. A re-lottery effect may be executed during a predetermined round. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the round in which the redrawing effect is executed is determined in advance (for example, the seventh round or the fifteenth round).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is after being opened (closed) is received, an interval display or the like is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Note that a re-lottery effect may be executed during the ending effect.

  Small hit effect processing (step S808): After receiving the fanfare command designating the start of the small hit after the end of the variation time, the two round effect, which is the effect during the small hit, is executed.

  FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  The process data shown in FIG. 115 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. The notification process table will be described later.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of lamp control contents executed in accordance with process data (including notification process data) when each production control command is received. As shown in FIG. 116, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control receives a fanfare designation command and wins a big hit, the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f on the game board 6 blink. At the same time, each lamp (excluding the dish lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side is flashed at a time interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) faster than the probability variation state. By performing such an effect, an effect that gives a flashy impression when a big hit occurs can be performed by causing more lamps to blink and display at a faster time interval.

  For example, when the ending designation command is received, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control so that only the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f on the game board 6 are lit. Control is performed so that the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side are blinked at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1 second).

  In addition, when receiving the input port data designation command in which the random number error designation bit is set and performing the random number error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives each lamp on the game frame 11 side (excluding the dish lamp). Effects such as lighting 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e are performed. When an input port data designation command in which the full tank error designation bit is set is received and a full tank error notification is made, an effect of blinking the pan lamps 82a to 82d is performed. When an input port data designation command in which the door opening error designation bit (door opening 1 error designation bit, door opening 2 error designation bit) is set and a door opening error notification is issued, each game frame 11 side The lamps (excluding dish lamps) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e are flashed. When an input port data designation command in which the ball-out error designation bit is set is received and a ball-out error notification is made, an effect of blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side is performed. When an input port data designation command in which the payout error designation bit is set is received and a payout error notification is made, an effect is performed such that the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side blink. When an abnormal winning notification designation command is received and an abnormal winning notification is made, an effect is made such that the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side are blinked.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 101 receives an input port data designation command in which the prize ball count designation bit is set and performs a prize ball payout notification, the left prize ball lamp 51a on the game frame 11 side and the right prize are displayed. An effect of blinking the ball lamp 51b is performed.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S811). If it has been set, the flag is reset (step S812). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the contents (variation pattern, variation time) designated by the variation pattern command (step S813). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S814).

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S821). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S822).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses any one of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, first door opening error notification flag, second door opening error notification flag, out of ball error notification flag, payout error notification. An effect device (variable display device 9 as an effect part) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, sound number data 1) on condition that the flag and abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag) are not set , And control of the speaker 27) as a production component is executed (step S824). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data 1 (step S825). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for lighting the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f in a predetermined data storage area. In addition, lamp control signals for lighting all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e and 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side are set in a predetermined data storage area. To do. The lamp control signal set in step S825 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If any error flag is set in step S823 (Y in step S823), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 and the lamp control execution data 1. Control of the effect device is executed (step S826). In other words, when any error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, the sound effect and the lamp display effect corresponding to the variable display are not executed. , Sound output and lamp display according to various error notifications (random error notification, full tank error notification, first door opening error notification, second door opening error notification, ball outage error notification, payout error notification, abnormal winning error notification) The production continues.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S826, the production control microcomputer 100 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. To do. That is, control is performed so that the display at that time (error notification is made) on the variable display device 9 and the image of the display effect of the variable display of the decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the variable display device 9. That is, when any error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, not only a display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but various error notifications are performed. The notification according to is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S827), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S828).

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation process, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and decrements the value of the variation time timer by -1 (1 subtraction) (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S844).

  Any error flag (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, first door opening error notification flag, second door opening error notification flag, out of ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag, abnormal winning designation command reception flag ) Is not set (N in step S845A), the control state for the variable display device 9 as the production device is changed based on the display control execution data and sound number data set next. (Step S845B).

  In step S845B, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, for example. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data (step S845C). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for lighting the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f in a predetermined data storage area. In addition, lamp control signals for lighting all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e and 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side are set in a predetermined data storage area. To do. The lamp control signal set in step S845C is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If any one of the error flags is set (Y in step S845A), the contents of the next process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, the sound number data i and the lamp control execution data i) Control of the effect device is executed in accordance with (Excluding Step S845D). Therefore, when any of the error flags is set, a sound effect according to the variable display of the decorative design and a display effect by the lamp are not executed, but various error notifications (random error notification, full error notification) The sound output and the lamp display effect according to the first door opening error notification, the second door opening error notification, the ball running out error notification, the payout error notification, and the abnormal winning notification) are continued.

  In addition, when the process of step S845D is performed, the production control microcomputer 100 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also issues a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. Output. Therefore, when any one of the error flags is set, not only the display effect according to the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, but also the notification according to various error notifications is continued.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (Y in step S846), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S848). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command (decoration symbol stop designation command) has been received is set (Y in step S847), the process proceeds to step S848. Thus, even if the variation time timer has not timed out, when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to the variation stop, so for example, the variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates Even when the normal variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol variation ends), the decoration symbol variation can be terminated.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set (Y in step S851), the confirmed command reception flag is reset (step S852), and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined and stored in the command analysis process is derived and displayed. Control is performed (step S853).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command (decorative symbol stop designation command) from the game control microcomputer 560. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and control for stopping and displaying decorative symbols may be performed based on the time-up of the variable time timer.

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol derived and displayed in step S853 is a small hit symbol (Y in step S854), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether the fan hit reception flag for small hit is set. (Step S855). When the small hitting fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S855), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a two-round effect based on the contents of the stored fanfare command (step S856). . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a process table corresponding to the selected 2-round production (step S857). Then, the process timer is started (step S858), and the 2R effect time timer for measuring the execution time of the 2-round effect is started (step S859). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process (step S808) (step S860).

  When the stop symbol of the decoration symbol derived and displayed in step S853 is not a big hit symbol but a big hit symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, sudden probability variation symbol) (Y in step S861), the production control microcomputer 100 performs Then, it is confirmed whether or not the fanfare reception flag is set (step S862). When the fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S862), the production control microcomputer 100 selects either the fanfare production or the 2-round production based on the contents of the stored fanfare command (step S862). S863). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a process table corresponding to the selected fanfare effect or two-round effect (step S864). Then, the process timer is started (step S865), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S866).

  If the stop symbol of the decoration symbol derived and displayed in step S861 is not a big hit symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, or sudden probability variation symbol), that is, if it is an outlier symbol (N in step S861), the production control microcomputer. 100 resets a predetermined flag (step S867). For example, the symbol information command reception flag is reset. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S868).

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set (step S901). The special winning opening open flag is set in the command analysis process (see step S649). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in Step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S902), and the production device (variable) Control of the display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903A). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a big hit has occurred. Further, for example, in the effect for two rounds, an effect for displaying special characters or characters is executed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components in accordance with the lamp control execution data (step S903B).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (the number of rounds) based on the contents of the 15 round big prize opening open command. An effect for executing the corresponding round display is selected (step S907). When a command for opening a special prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select an effect since an effect for 2 rounds is continuously executed during the round, but 2 for each round. When switching the effect included in the performance for round (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for two rounds may be newly selected for each round. . Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and a process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S911).

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the processing during the round, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether the production control microcomputer 100 has set the flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that the command after opening the special prize opening has been received. (Step S921). Note that the flag after opening the special winning opening is set in the command analysis process (see step S649). When the flag after the big prize opening is not set (N in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S922), and the production device (variable) Control of the display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S923). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. Moreover, in the effect for two rounds, the effect which displays a special character, a character, etc. is performed. When a lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game (when the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is set), a round of a predetermined round (for example, the seventh round, the fifteenth round, etc.) The re-lottery effect is executed in the medium effect. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components in accordance with the lamp control execution data (step S923B).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S924), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S925). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S926).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S921 (Y in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the command after opening the big prize opening. An effect for performing interval display is selected (step S928). When a command is received after opening the grand prize opening for 2 rounds, there is no need to select a new production since there is no need to select a new production since 2 rounds of production have been executed. When switching the effect included in the effect for the second time (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for the second round may be newly selected after the round. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after opening the special winning opening (step S928), and selects a process table corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S929). Then, the process timer is started (step S930), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S931).

  123 and 124 are flowcharts showing the round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S940). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S940), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command is received is set. Confirmation is made (step S941). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S942), and the production device (variable) Control of the display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S943A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data (step S943B).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S944), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S945). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S946).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether it is necessary to execute the re-lottery production during the big hit (during the round) ( Step S947). Specifically, when the fanfare reception flag corresponding to the reception of the fanfare command designating execution of the re-lottery effect during the big hit is set and the execution round in which the re-lottery effect is executed, It is determined that it is necessary to execute a re-lottery effect.

  When it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the big hit (Y in step S947), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the in-round effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S948). Then, a re-lottery execution completion flag is set (step S949). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (N in Step S947), the mid-round effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (Step S950).

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S951), and a process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S952). Then, the process timer is started (step S953), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S954).

  When the ending reception flag is set in step S940 (Y in step S940), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (step S955). Specifically, when the ending reception flag corresponding to the reception of the ending command specifying that the re-drawing effect is executed during the ending effect is set, it is necessary to execute the re-drawing effect during the ending effect. Judge.

  When it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (Y in step S955), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S956). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending effect (N in step S955), an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (step S957).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending reception flag (step S958), and selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (step S959). Then, the process timer is started (step S960), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S807) (step S961).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S971), and executes a process of controlling the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data. (Step S972A). For example, when the end of the big hit is displayed, or when a re-lottery effect is included in the ending effect, the re-lottery effect is executed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data (step S972B).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S973), and if the process timer has timed out, resets a predetermined flag (such as a symbol information command reception flag). (Step S974), the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (Step S800) (Step S975).

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the small hit effect process (step S808) in the effect control process. In the small hit effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S981), and executes a process of controlling the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data. (Step S982A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components in accordance with the lamp control execution data (step S982B).

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the 2R effect time timer has timed out (step S983). If it has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is. If not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S984), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S985). . Then, the process timer is started (step S986).

  If the 2R effect time timer has timed out (Y in step S983), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets predetermined flags (such as a small hit flag and a symbol information command reception flag) (step S987). The value of the control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S988).

  Next, the notification control process process in step S707 will be described. First, various error notification modes executed in the notification control process will be described. FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of various error notification and prize ball payout notification modes executed in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 127, the door opening error notification (common to both the first door opening error notification and the second door opening error notification) is performed while the glass door frame 2 or the game frame 11 is opened (for example, the first door). (While the detection signal of the opening switch (1) 154 or the second door opening switch (2) 155 is input). When performing the door opening error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to blink all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side. . In addition, control is performed so that a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) is output to the speaker 27 together with a sound “door is open”.

  Further, the ball break error notification is executed from the occurrence of a ball break until the ball break state is canceled (for example, while a detection signal of a ball break switch is input). The effect control microcomputer 100 performs control of blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side when notifying the ball break error. The full tank error notification is executed from the occurrence of the full tank state of the lower pan until the full tank state is canceled (for example, while the detection signal of the full tank switch is input). When performing the full tank error notification, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to cause the tray lamps 82a to 82d on the game frame 11 side to blink and to output a sound “the bottom plate is full”. In addition, control is performed to display “the bottom plate is full” on the variable display device 9. In this case, when display by a game effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) is performed on the variable display device 9, a character string “bottom plate is full” is superimposed on the variable display device 9. .

  Also, the payout error notification is executed from the occurrence of the payout error until the payout error state is canceled. When performing the payout error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to blink the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side. Further, the random number error notification is executed until the power is turned off after the random number error is detected when the gaming machine is turned on. When performing random number error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 lights all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side, as well as a predetermined number. Control is performed to output an error sound (for example, a beep sound). In addition, control is performed to display “error” on the variable display device 9. In this case, when display by a game effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) is performed on the variable display device 9, a character string “error” is superimposed on the variable display device 9.

  The prize ball payout notification is executed during a period in which the prize ball payout is being executed. However, since the end point of the prize ball payout notification is determined based on the prize ball count designation bit in the input port data designation command by the effect control microcomputer 100, it is slightly delayed from the end point of the actual prize ball payout. . When performing the prize ball payout notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 blinks the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b on the game frame 11 side and outputs a predetermined notification sound (prize ball payout notification sound). To control.

  Also, the abnormal winning notification is executed from the occurrence of the abnormal winning until the power is turned off. When performing the abnormal winning notification, the production control microcomputer 100 lights all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side, and performs predetermined operations. Control is performed to output an error sound (for example, a beep sound). Further, control is performed to display “a winning error has occurred” on the variable display device 9. In this case, when display by a game effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) is performed on the variable display device 9, a character string “a winning error has occurred” is superimposed on the variable display device 9. .

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the notification control process (step S707) in the main process. In the notification control process, the production control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S1900 and S1901 according to the value of the notification control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  The notification start processing (step S1900) includes an initial notification flag set in the command analysis processing, each error flag (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, payout error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag, door opening error notification flag ( This is a process for starting notification of an error or the like based on a first door opening error notification flag, a second door opening error notification flag), an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag) and a prize ball payout notification flag. When the notification is started, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the processing during notification (step S1901).

  The in-notification process (step S1901) includes an initial notification flag, each error flag (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, payout error notification flag, out of ball error notification flag, door open error notification flag, abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag. ) And the prize ball payout notification flag. Further, the notification is ended based on the error notification release flag set in the command analysis process or based on the fact that the prize ball payout notification flag is reset. When the notification is finished, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1901).

  FIG. 129 and FIG. 130 are flowcharts showing the notification start process (step S1900) in the notification control process. In the notification start process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1911). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command (power-on designation command, power failure restoration designation command) is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see steps S641 and S644 in FIG. 110). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the initial notification period value in the period timer 1 (step S1912). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of an initialization designation command. The production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether the door opening error notification flag (first door opening error notification flag, second door opening error notification flag) is set. (Step S1913). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects notification process data corresponding to the door opening error (step S1914). In this embodiment, a notification process table (notification process) for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, 51a, 51b, and 82a to 82d when performing various notifications. Table) is prepared in advance. The notification process table will be described later.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a notification process timer (step S1915) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1916). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) together with a sound such as “the door is open”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1917). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 generates lamp control signals for blinking all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided in the game frame 11. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1917 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each of the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604. Then, control goes to a step S1949.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the random number error flag is set (step S1918). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display a random number error display screen indicating that it is a random number error on the variable display device 9 (step S1919). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a notification process table corresponding to the random number error (step S1920). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the notification process timer (step S1921) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1922). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1923). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 generates lamp control signals for blinking all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided in the game frame 11. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1923 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604. Then, control goes to a step S1949.

  If the random error flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the prize ball payout notification flag is set (step S1924). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a notification process table corresponding to the prize ball payout notification (step S1925). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a notification process timer (step S1926) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1927). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined prize ball payout notification sound.

  In this embodiment, when notifying that the winning ball is being paid out, notification is performed using the speaker 27 in addition to the lamp. However, only the notification processing using the lamp is performed and the speaker 27 is used. The notification process using the sound that has been heard may not be performed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b (step S1928). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for lighting the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b provided in the game frame in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1928 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the frame side IC substrates 603 and 604. Then, control goes to a step S1949.

  If the winning ball payout notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the full tank error notification flag is set (step S1929). If it is set, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a control to display a full tank error display screen indicating that it is a full tank error on the variable display device 9 (step S1930). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a notification process table corresponding to the full tank error (step S1931). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a notification process timer (step S1932) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1933). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a sound such as “the bottom plate is full”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1934). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for blinking the dish lamps 82a to 82d provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1934 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. To the frame-side IC substrate 605.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the payout error notification flag is set (step S1935). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a notification process table corresponding to the payout error (step S1936) and starts a notification process timer (step S1937).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1938). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1938 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  In this embodiment, when a payout error is notified, only the notification process using the lamp is performed and the notification process using the speaker 27 is not performed. However, the speaker 27 is used in addition to the lamp. You may make it perform notification which was.

  If the payout error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the ball break error notification flag is set (step S1939). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a notification process table corresponding to the ball break error (step S1940) and starts a notification process timer (step S1941).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1942). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1942 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  In this embodiment, a case where only a notification process using a lamp is performed and a notification process using a sound using the speaker 27 is not performed when a ball break error is notified will be described. The used notification may be performed.

  If the ball break error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set (step S1943). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormal winning display screen indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred on the variable display device 9 (step S1944). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a notification process table corresponding to the abnormal winning (step S1945). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the notification process timer (step S1946) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1947). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a sound such as “a winning error has occurred”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1948). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for blinking the dish lamps 82a to 82d provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1948 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. To the frame-side IC substrate 605.

  In step S1949, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during notification (step S1901), and ends the processing.

  131 to 133 are flowcharts showing the notification-in-progress processing (step S1901) in the notification control process. In the notification process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1960). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command (power-on designation command, power failure restoration designation command) is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see steps S641 and S644 in FIG. 110). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1965. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the timer 1 set in step S1912 is decremented by 1 (step S1961). When the value of the period timer 1 becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1962, S1963). If the value of the period timer 1 is not 0, the process is terminated as it is. Thus, in this embodiment, the initial notification period (abnormal winning notification prohibition period) is configured to be measured on the production control microcomputer 100 side.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the variable display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1964). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the variable display device 9 in response to the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1965). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1971. If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer by 1 (step S1966) and switches the notification process data when the notification process timer times out (step S1967). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1968).

  FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the notification process table. The notification process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the presentation control microcomputer 100 performs various notifications by controlling the presentation device. In other words, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 and each lamp according to the data set in the notification process table, and performs notification such as error notification. The notification process table is composed of data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, notification lamp control execution data, and notification sound number data. In the process timer set value, the duration in the sound output state and the lamp display state is set. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the notification process table, and controls the lighting / non-lighting state of each lamp in a manner set in the lamp display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. At the same time, the sound output using the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The notification process table shown in FIG. 134 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the notification process table is prepared according to the type of error (random number error, full tank error, door opening error, ball break error, payout error, abnormal winning error). Further, in this embodiment, every time the notification process timer times out, the lighting of the pattern A and the lighting of the pattern B are switched, and the lighting or blinking is controlled.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1969). In step S1969, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the door is open” and a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp corresponding to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1970). For example, in step S1970, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side to blink. Are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1970 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the random number error flag is set (step S1971). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer (step S1972), and when the notification process timer times out (step S1973), switches the notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1974).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1975). In step S1975, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1976). For example, in step S1976, the production control microcomputer 100 turns on all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side. Are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1976 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the random error flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set (step S1977). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer by 1 (step S1978) and switches the notification process data when the notification process timer times out (step S1979). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1980).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1981). In step S 1981, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1982). For example, in step S1982, the production control microcomputer 100 turns on all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side. Are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1982 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the winning ball payout notification flag is set (step S1983). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1993. If set, the value of the prize ball count designation monitoring timer is decremented by 1 (step S1984). If the prize ball count designation monitoring timer times out (step S1985), the prize ball payout notification flag is reset (step S1991), and control is performed to turn off the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b (step S1991). Step S1992). Specifically, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 613 and 614. Then, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  If the award ball count designation monitoring timer has not timed out, the notification process timer is decremented by 1 (step S1986). When the notification process timer has timed out (step S1987), the notification process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1988).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1989). In step S1989, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the prize ball payout notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined prize ball payout notification sound.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp in accordance with the notification of winning ball payout in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1990). In step S1990, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for turning on or off the prize ball lamps 51a and 51b provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1990 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the winning ball payout notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the full tank error notification flag is set (step S1993). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1999. If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notifying process timer (step S1994), and when the notifying process timer times out (step S1995), switches the notifying process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1996).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1997). In step S1997, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the bottom plate is full”.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1998). For example, in step S1998, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the pan lamps 82a to 82d in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1998 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the payout error notification flag is set (step S1999). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2004. If it is set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer (step S2000), and when the notification process timer times out (step S2001), switches the notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S2002).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S2003). For example, in step S2003, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2003 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the payout error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the ball-out error notification flag is set (step S2004). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2009. If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer (step S2005) and switches the notification process data when the notification process timer times out (step S2006). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S2007).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S2008). For example, in step S2008, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2008 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, when notifying a ball break error or payout error, no sound is output from the speaker 27, but when notifying a ball break error or payout error. Alternatively, sound output control using the speaker 27 may be performed.

  In step S2009, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an error notification release flag is set. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. In step S2010, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900), and ends the process. Note that changing the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900) means that error notification is immediately stopped, but at that time, various error notification modes (FIG. 127) is returned to the original state. If the error notification release flag is set, the error notification flag is also reset, so if the decorative symbol change is being executed at that time, it is subject to the condition that no other error notification flag is set. The aspects of the variable display device 9, various lamps, and the speaker 27 return to the aspect corresponding to the variation pattern (see steps S845A to S845C in FIG. 119).

  Various notifications are executed by executing the processing as described above. In addition, the random number error notification is performed from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control command transmitted first except for the power-on designation command and the power failure recovery designation command after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Since the random number error is notified to 100, the priority is highest regardless of the control order.

  In this embodiment, when another error occurs while a certain error notification is being executed (including the case where a plurality of errors occur simultaneously), the error notification mode is set to other error. The error notification mode may be changed. For example, when the door open error notification flag is set during the execution of the full tank error notification, the error notification mode becomes the door open error notification mode (in the program, prior to the processing of steps S1993 to S1998). Since the process of step S1965 is configured to be executed). In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 switches the notification process table to be used. Also, the error notification mode does not change, and error notification for other errors may be started after the currently executed error notification ends. For example, when the ball full error notification flag is set while the full tank error notification is being executed, the full tank error notification is continued, and after the full tank error notification ends, the error notification about the ball full error starts. (Since the program is configured so that the process of step S2004 is not executed when the process of steps S1993 to S1998 is executed. In addition, during the error notification being executed, Because the error notification flag remains set).

  However, when another error occurs while a certain error notification is being executed, the error notification mode may be changed to the error notification mode for other errors at all times. In such a control, when it is determined “N” in step S1960, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that all error notification flags (random number error flag, door opening error notification flag, full tank error notification flag, Whether or not a full tank error notification flag and an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag) are set is confirmed. Further, as an error notification mode, in addition to an error notification mode (see FIGS. 127 and 135) when each error occurs independently, an error notification mode when multiple types of errors occur is defined. . For example, error notification mode when only door opening error occurs, error notification mode when door opening error and random number error occur, error notification when door opening error, random number error and full error occur The mode of error notification when a door opening error, a random number error, a full tank error, and a ball breakage error occur is defined. For other errors, in addition to an error notification mode when an error occurs independently, an error notification mode when one or more other errors are generated is defined. Data indicating these error modes is stored as a table in the ROM, for example. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects an error notification mode with reference to a table corresponding to the set one or more error notification flags. Then, error notification based on the selected error notification mode is executed. When any error notification flag is reset during execution of error notification corresponding to a plurality of errors, the error notification mode is changed to the error notification mode except for the error corresponding to the error notification flag. Change to

  In this embodiment, the setting / resetting of the winning ball payout notification flag is also determined by the notification control process. However, the winning ball payout based on the set / reset of the winning ball payout notification flag and the setting of the winning ball is set. Notification control may be executed by processing different from the notification control process.

  Next, a lamp control signal set in a predetermined data storage area according to the notification lamp control execution data will be described. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lamp control signal output by a serial signal method in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 135, in this embodiment, two types of notification lamp control execution data (pattern A and pattern B) are used for each notification type. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching and using the notification lamp control execution data for the pattern A and the pattern B. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 135 in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with the notification lamp control execution data. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the notification lamp control execution data, and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 135, each lamp control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the addresses of the output destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 added thereto. For example, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 that supplies a control signal to some of the lamps 281a to 281f among the ceiling lamps is “01”, the address “ “0001” is added. In addition, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 that supplies the control signal to the other lamps 281g to 281l among the ceiling lamps is “02”, the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is included. The address “0010” is added and stored. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 that supplies the control signal to the lamps 283a to 283e of the right frame lamp and the right prize ball lamp 51b is “03”, the address of the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is addressed. Stored with “0011” added. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 that supplies the control signal to the lamps 282a to 282e of the left frame lamp and the left prize ball lamp 51a is “04”, the address of the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is addressed. Stored with “0100” added.

  When notifying a random number error, as shown in FIG. 135, the control data body is “00111111” or “00011111” in each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 whose addresses are “01” to “04”. A lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting each lamp are all 1 is output, and all the lamps (excluding dish lamps and prize ball lamps) 281a to 281a provided on the game frame 11 side. 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e are turned on.

  When notifying the door opening error, as shown in FIG. 135, first, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 611 having addresses from “01” to “04” based on the pattern A notification lamp control execution data are displayed. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” or “00011111” is transmitted to 614. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting each lamp are all 1 is output, and all the lamps (excluding dish lamps and prize ball lamps) 281a to 281a provided on the game frame 11 side. 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e are turned on. Further, when the process data is switched, the control data body is “00000000” in each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 614 whose addresses are “01” to “04” based on the lamp control execution data for notification of pattern B. A lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting each lamp are all 0 is output, and all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side are output. Turns off. When notifying the door opening error by repeatedly performing such control, all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side are blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying the payout error, as shown in FIG. 135, first, based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern A, the control data body is “00111111” in the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 having the address “01”. Is transmitted, and the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is “02”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and only the ceiling lamps 281a to 281f provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. . At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01” based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern B, and the address is A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 of “02”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to some other LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and constitutes another part of the ceiling lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. Only the LED is lit. When notifying a payout error by repeating such control, the top frame lamps 281a to 281f and the top frame lamps 281g to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying a ball break error, as shown in FIG. 135, first, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having addresses “01” and “02” based on the notification lamp control execution data for the pattern A, respectively. In addition, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. In addition, when the process data is switched, the serial data to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having the addresses “01” and “02” and the control data body “00000000” based on the lamp control execution data for the pattern B notification. A control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 0 is output, and the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a ball-out error, control is performed such that only the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side blink at predetermined time intervals.

  When notifying a full tank error, as shown in FIG. 135, first, based on the pattern A notification lamp control execution data, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05”, the control data body is “00001111”. Lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the dish lamps 82a to 82d are all 1 is output, and the dish lamps 82a to 82d are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05” based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern B. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the dish lamp are all 0 is output, and the dish lamps 82a to 82d are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a full tank error, control is performed so that only the pan lamps 82a to 82d blink at a predetermined time interval.

  In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, the first bit is an input signal to the lamp 82a, the second bit is an input signal to the lamp 82b, the third bit is an input signal to the lamp 82c, 4 The bit corresponds to the input signal to the lamp 82d, and the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the lamp 83.

  When notifying the prize ball payout, as shown in FIG. 135, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00100000” is sent to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 613 and 614 having addresses “03” and “04”. Sent. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the LEDs constituting the prize ball lamp is output, and the left prize ball 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on.

  At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern B. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical value of the bit corresponding to the LED constituting the prize ball lamp is 0 is output, and the left prize ball 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off.

  When notifying an abnormal winning, as shown in FIG. 135, first, based on the notification lamp control execution data of pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having addresses “01” and “02” are first notified. The lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. In addition, when the process data is switched, the serial data to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having the addresses “01” and “02” and the control data body “00000000” based on the lamp control execution data for the pattern B notification. A control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 0 is output, and the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a ball-out error, control is performed such that only the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side blink at predetermined time intervals.

  In the example shown in FIG. 135, the lamp control signal is also supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control when performing notification. By doing so, it is possible to reliably turn off the lamp that is not the control target at the time of error notification.

  However, when performing various notifications, the lamp control signal may not be output (transmitted) to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of the lamps that are not subject to display control.

  Next, the serial setting process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial setting process. The serial setting process includes, for example, various kinds of decorative symbol display in the effect control process (see Steps S825 and 845C) and various effects during a big hit (Steps S903B, S923B, S943B, S972B, and S982B). Is performed (steps S1917, S1923, S1928, S1934, S1938, S1942, S1948, S1970, S1976, S1982, S1990, S1998, S2003, S2008). Here, the control of the movable members 151 to 153 is also referred to.

  In the serial setting process, the production control CPU 101 first reads out lamp control execution data (such as lamp lighting pattern data associated with the variation pattern, motor control data (step S845C only), etc.) from the ROM (step S4000). In this case, for example, when performing the serial setting process during the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect control CPU 101 reads the lamp control execution data of the process table shown in FIG. When serial setting processing is performed in the notification control process, notification lamp control execution data in the notification process table shown in FIG. 134 is read.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the display state of each lamp is changed based on the read lamp control execution data (step S4001). If there is a change in the display state of each lamp, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the lamp control signal to which the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC of the lamp to be displayed is added from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area. (Step S4002). Next, header data (1FF (H)), mark bits, and end bits shown in FIG. 31 are added to the extracted ramp control signal, and the data is set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM as shown in FIG. (Step S4003). Then, a lamp control signal output request flag is set (step S4004).

  For example, when the serial setting process is executed in steps S1917, S1923, and S1928 in the notification control process, one of the lamp control signals with an address shown in FIG. 135 is read in step S4002, and the data in step S4003. It will be set in the storage area.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 reads display control execution data from the ROM (step S4005). In this case, for example, when performing the serial setting process during execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the production control microcomputer 100 reads display control execution data of the process table shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the serial setting process is performed in the notification control process, since the display control execution data is not included in the notification process table shown in FIG. 134, N is determined as it is in the next step S4006. Become.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not any of the movable members 151 to 153 is included in the game effect based on the read display control execution data (step S4006). When the movable members 151 to 153 are movable, the production control microcomputer 100 adds a serial-parallel conversion IC address (“06” in this example) of the movable members 151 to 153 to be moved. A control signal is extracted from a predetermined motor control signal storage area (step S4007). Next, the header data (1FF (H)), mark bit, and end bit shown in FIG. 31 are added to the extracted motor control signal, and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM as shown in FIG. 137. (Step S4008). Then, a motor control signal output request flag is set (step S4009).

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of the serial input / output process (step S708). In the serial input / output process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is set (step S4020). If set, the lamp control signal output request flag or motor control signal output request flag is reset (step S4021), and the lamp control signal and motor control signal stored in the data storage area are transferred to the serial output circuit 353. Output (step S4022). In this case, when a plurality of lamp control signals are set in the data storage area, the effect control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads each lamp control signal and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353 in step S4022. The output lamp control signal and motor control signal are converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353 and serially transmitted to the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607. It will be output in the signal system.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrates 606 and 607 (step S4023). . The input IC 621 mounted on the panel-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b, 152b, 153b based on the input input signal being input, and relays boards 606, 607 in a serial signal system. Is output to the effect control board 80. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 reads input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S4024). In step S4024, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after the serial input circuit 354 delays the input data from the input IC 621.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the frame side IC substrate 605 via the relay substrate 607 (step S4025). The input IC 620 mounted on the board-side IC board 605 latches the detection signals of the operation buttons 81a to 81e based on the input input signal being input, and produces the effect via the relay board 607 in a serial signal system. The data is output to the control board 80. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S4026). In step S4026, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after the serial input circuit 354 delays the input data from the input IC 620.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the door opening switch (1) 154 for detecting whether or not the door (the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105) is opened, and the power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. Even if it is, it is provided with the backup power supply 505 which can supply electric power to the door opening switch (1) 154. In addition, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped based on the detection that the door (the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105) is opened by the door opening switch (1) 154, An information terminal board 34 is provided that can output a door opening signal indicating that the opening of a predetermined second frame has been detected to an external device (for example, a hall computer) provided outside the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent an illegal act performed by opening the door (the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 23 in a gaming state other than the big hit gaming state. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes abnormality notification indicating that the abnormal winning has occurred, based on the determination that the abnormal winning has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent an illegal act that generates an illegal prize without opening the door (the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105). Therefore, an illegal act performed by opening a door (glass door frame 2 or mechanism plate 105) provided in the gaming machine is prevented, and an illegal prize is awarded without opening the door (glass door frame 2 or mechanism plate 105). It is possible to prevent fraud that generates

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the information terminal board 34 is provided with semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC9, and the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC9 are in a case where power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Even if it exists, it drives with the electric power supplied from the backup power supply 505. FIG. Therefore, an illegal signal input to the information terminal board 34 can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, among the circuits and circuit elements provided in the gaming machine 1, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC9 provided on the information output board. In other circuits and circuit elements, diodes 506a and 917 for preventing backflow that prevent the current from the backup power supply 505 from flowing back are provided. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the current from being supplied in the reverse direction, and it becomes impossible to detect whether the door (the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate 105) provided in the gaming machine 1 or the gaming frame 11 is opened. The situation can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the main board 31 on which the game control microcomputer 560 for executing the game control process for controlling the progress of the game is mounted, the ball payout device 97 for paying out the game ball, A payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer 370 for executing a payout control process for controlling the payout device 97 is mounted, a payout number count switch 301 for detecting that a game ball has been paid out by the ball payout device 97, and A single information terminal board 34 that is connected only to the main board 31 and outputs input information to an external device (for example, a hall computer) outside the gaming machine 1 is provided. The game control microcomputer 560 outputs control information generated during the execution of the game control process, and the game is based on the fact that the payout count switch 301 detects that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out. Control information indicating that the ball has been paid out is output to the information terminal board 34. Therefore, the wiring work for the information terminal board 34 can be facilitated.

  According to this embodiment, the door opening switch (1) 154 outputs a door opening 1 signal when it detects that the glass door frame 2 is opened or the mechanism plate 105 is opened. The information terminal board 34 is connected to the door opening 1 signal from the door opening switch (1) 154 via the main board 31. Therefore, the wiring work for the information terminal board 34 can be facilitated.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a game ball has won a special variable winning device (large winning opening) in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state (Y in step S362A, N in S362B), Since the transmission of the winning ball number signal is prohibited (the processing of steps S364 and S365 is not executed), it is possible to prevent the winning ball from being paid based on an illegal act and A prize ball information signal suitable for the given payout control can be output to the hall computer.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 in the closed state of the variable winning ball device 15 (the normal symbol process flag is other than 3) (in step S363A). Y, N in S363B), because the configuration is such that the transmission of the award ball number signal is prohibited (the processing in steps S364 and S365 is not executed), so that the award ball payout based on fraud is prevented. And a prize ball information signal suitable for the payout control actually performed can be output to the hall computer.

  In addition, when an abnormal winning is detected a plurality of times (when the ON state is detected twice consecutively after changing from the OFF state to the ON state by the processing of steps S331 to S338 in FIG. 69), an abnormality is detected. It is determined that a winning has occurred, the occurrence of the abnormal winning is notified, and the control for prohibiting the fluctuation of the symbol and prohibiting the payout of the winning ball is executed. Therefore, even if the switch detection signal is turned on due to noise or the like, it is ensured that an abnormal winning notification, a symbol variation prohibition, or a prize ball payout prohibition control is erroneously executed. Can be prevented. Further, the processing for detecting an abnormal winning a plurality of times may be set as one set, and it may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred when a plurality of abnormal winnings are detected. In this case, it is possible to further prevent erroneous detection of abnormal winnings, and to reliably prevent erroneous execution of notification of abnormal winning occurrences, prohibition of symbol fluctuations, and prohibition of prize ball payouts. can do.

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 wins a game ball in the second start winning opening 14 by the information output process, start information (indicating that the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 as control information) Identification information indicating that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed as the control information when the display result of the variable display of the identification information (symbol) is derived and displayed. The information (symbol confirmation number signal) is output, and the game control microcomputer 560 wins the game ball at the second start winning opening 14 in the closed state of the variable winning ball device 15 (normal symbol process flag is other than 3). If determined, start of variable display of identification information on the variable display device 9 is prohibited (steps S317 to S319 are skipped when N in step S316). When the game control microcomputer 560 is prohibited from starting the variable display of the identification information, the game control microcomputer 560 is prohibited from outputting the identification information confirmation information (second starting prize opening). 14 is output to the information terminal board 34 based on the winning (abnormal winning) 14, but the symbol display frequency signal is not output as a result of the variable display of the identification information not being started). Therefore, it is possible to surely prevent transition to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) due to fraud, and to provide identification information confirmation information suitable for variable display control actually performed in the external device (hall computer). Can be output.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the respective lamps based on the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560. The control signal is output by a serial signal system. Further, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected through one system wiring. At the same time, different address information is assigned in advance, and only the control signal with its own address information added is converted into a parallel signal system and output. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 provided in the game board 6, address information that can identify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 is provided. The added control signal is output by the serial signal system. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 provided in the game frame 11, address information that can identify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 is provided. The added control signal is output by the serial signal system. Therefore, the number of wirings between the game board 6 and the game frame 11 can be reduced. Therefore, in a gaming machine in which the game frame 11 and the game board 6 are configured to be detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame 11 and the game board 6.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 and the serial-parallel mounted on each frame-side IC board 602 to 604 by the relay boards 606 and 607. The connection with the conversion ICs 611 to 615 is relayed. Further, the relay board 607 relays the connection between the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 604 and the effect control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the attachment / detachment work between the game frame and the game board 6 can be easily performed only by performing the connection work and the removal work to the relay boards 606 and 607.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the frame side IC substrate 602 is provided as a collective substrate on which two serial-parallel conversions 611 and 612 are mounted on the game frame side. A board-side IC board 601 as a collective board on which four serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 are mounted is provided on the game board 6 side. Therefore, the boards on which the serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted can be integrated, and the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected to each other by the connector. Are connected through one line of wiring. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed simply by attaching and detaching the connector, and the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be attached and detached more easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the serial signal system using the serial output circuit 78. Therefore, the number of wires between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 can also be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605. A clock signal used in common for the ICs 611 to 615 and the input ICs 620 and 621 is output. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input ICs 620 and 621 can be easily synchronized. The number of clock signal wirings can also be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 may store the device IDs of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 as addresses in a predetermined address storage area of the RAM in advance. If comprised in that way, each lamp | ramp 125a-125f, 126a-126f, 281a-281l, 282a-282f, 283a-283f will be controlled using ID information intrinsic | native to serial-parallel conversion IC611-619 as address information. be able to.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether one or more of the plurality of state detection signals input to the input port unit have changed, and determines whether the plurality of state detection signals are out of the plurality of state detection signals. When it is determined that any one or more states have changed, a plurality of state detection signals input to the input port portion are collectively transmitted as a command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the game control micro Based on the command transmitted by the computer 560, it is determined which state of the plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine has changed, and the electric component is notified to correspond to the determined information regarding the state of the gaming machine. Since it is comprised, when making various alerts | reports with an electrical component, the control burden of the microcomputer 560 for game control does not become heavy.

  In the above-described embodiment, various notifications are executed by the lamp, the speaker 27 and the variable display device 9, and when executed by the variable display device 9, the notification display and the effect display are superimposed. However, for example, notification may be displayed in a part of the display area of the variable display device 9 without being superimposed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 and the like by the parallel signal method, but the effect control command may be transmitted by the parallel signal method.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an error occurs, various notifications (such as a door opening error and a ball break error shown in FIG. 127) are executed even during the change of the symbol. Further, it may be configured to execute during a big hit or a small hit. In particular, since a full tank error is likely to occur during a big hit, it is preferable to notify the full tank error during the big hit.

  In the embodiment described above, both the award ball BUSY signal and the award ball count signal are output from the payout control board 37 (the payout control microcomputer 370) to the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560). However, only one of the signals may be output. For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 inputs only the prize ball count signal, the game control microcomputer 560 recognizes the number of prize balls paid out by the prize ball count signal, thereby specifying a predetermined number (specified by the prize ball number signal). The completion of the award ball payout) may be recognized, and the award ball REQ signal may be turned off based on the recognition of the completion of the award ball payout. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 inputs only the prize ball BUSY signal, in the information output process (particularly, steps S1085 to S1111 in FIGS. 87 and 88), 10 prize ball payouts are recognized and awarded. Instead of outputting the ball signal, it is also possible to detect that the prize ball BUSY is turned off and recognize the number of prize balls paid out, and to output a prize ball signal for every 10 prize balls paid out.

  In the above embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 and outputs a prize ball count signal corresponding to the detection signal to the game control microcomputer 560. However, a signal line for transmitting the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is branched (for example, branched on the payout control board 37), and the signal line is connected to the main board 31, thereby the payout number. The detection signal from the count switch 301 may be directly input to the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560). In this case, it is not necessary to output a prize ball count signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs a prize ball signal to the information terminal board 34 based on the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301. In addition, the signal line for transmitting the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is not connected to the payout control board 37 but is connected only to the main board 31, so that the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is sent to the main board 31 (game). The control microcomputer 560) may be input. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a signal corresponding to the detection signal from the payout count switch 301 to the payout control microcomputer 370 (for example, a pulse indicating that one prize ball has been paid out). Signal).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the prize ball signal is 10 prize ball payouts per pulse, but may be one pulse per pulse, for example. In this case, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is directly output from the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34 without being input to the game control microcomputer 560, and is output from the information terminal board 34 to the hall computer. be able to. Since the payout control microcomputer 370 needs to recognize the number of payout balls, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is input.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 detects the door opening switch (1) 154 detection signal (door opening 1 signal) and the door opening switch (2) 155 detection signal (door opening 2 signal). Based on the above, the door opening (negative) signal and the door opening (positive) signal are output to the information terminal board 34. However, the door opening 1 signal and the door opening 2 signal are directly output from the main board 31. 34 may be output. In this case, it is not necessary to input the door opening 1 signal and the door opening 2 signal to the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the detection signal of the door opening switch (1) 154 (door opening 1 signal) and the detection signal of the door opening switch (2) 155 (door opening 2 signal) are not input to the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control is performed. Although it is input to the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 via the board 37, it is directly input to the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 without passing through the payout control board 37. Alternatively, after being input to the payout control microcomputer 370, it may be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the payout control microcomputer 370 sends a prize ball count signal to the game control microcomputer 560 (main board) in accordance with the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to output a prize ball signal (prize ball information signal) to the information terminal board 34 based on the inputted prize ball count signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the payout control microcomputer 370 passes the prize ball information signal to the information terminal board 34 via the main board 31 in accordance with the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301. You may comprise so that it may output.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 is configured to control various effect apparatuses. However, the circuit mounted on the first effect board includes , Control of any effect device among the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamp, and the circuit mounted on the second effect board controls any effect device of the effect devices. It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 8, FIG. 10 and the like, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the curve rod 700 that guides the game ball from the tank rail 160 to the ball payout device 97 is bent in a curved shape, but has a right-angle shape. It may be bent. In addition, the curve 樋 700 has two rows, but may have one row or three or more rows.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of each of the above embodiments can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention is applied even to a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol variably displayed becomes a predetermined symbol combination. it can. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  Moreover, in each embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown in the following (1) to (7) is also shown.

(1) A player can play a predetermined game using a game ball, and a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area provided in the game area (for example, winning holes 13, 14, 23, 29, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that pays out gaming balls based on winning of gaming balls to 30, 33, 39, and is a gaming ball tank that can store gaming balls used for gaming ( For example, a storage tank 38), a ball passage through which a game ball supplied from the game ball tank can pass (for example, curve 樋 700), and a game ball detecting means (for example, a presence or absence of a game ball in the ball passage) The ball break switch 197), a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out the game ball in the ball passage, and the payout means are controlled based on the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area. The payout process is executed, and the game ball detecting means A payout control means (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370 that executes the award ball lending control process in step S756) that stops the payout process of the game ball when it is detected that there is no game ball, and a game ball detection When the means detects that there is no game ball, a forcible switch (for example, forced change) that changes the game ball detection means to a state in which the presence of a game ball is detected according to the operation of the operator. Switch 400), and the forcible switch is covered with a cover body (for example, a ball break switch cover 197A) and has a biasing means 402 (see FIG. 16) for biasing the force against the operation of the operator. Gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, when the game ball detection means detects that there is no game ball, the game ball detection means forcibly detects that there is a game ball according to the operation of the operator. Since the forced switch is covered with a cover body and has a biasing means for biasing the force against the operation of the operator, the operator only performs a predetermined operation. The game balls stored on the downstream side of the payout means can be paid out, and the game ball detection means can be prevented from erroneously remaining in the on state.

(2) A player can play a predetermined game using a game ball, and a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area provided in the gaming area (for example, winning openings 13, 14, 23, 29, A game having an electrical component (for example, a lamp or a speaker) used for paying out a game ball based on the winning of the game balls to 30, 33, 39 and performing predetermined notification (for example, error notification) A game ball tank (for example, a storage tank 38) that can store a game ball used for a game, and a ball path through which a game ball supplied from the game ball tank can pass (For example, curve 樋 700), game ball detecting means for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the ball path (for example, a ball break switch 197), and payout means for discharging a game ball in the ball path (for example, ball payout) Device 97) and place The game ball payout process is executed by controlling the payout means based on the winning of the game ball to the winning area, and the game ball payout process is performed when the game ball detecting means detects that there is no game ball. The payout control board (for example, the payout control board 37) on which the payout control means to be stopped (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 for executing the award ball lending control processing in step S756) is mounted, and the game ball detecting means is a game. A forcible switch (for example, forcible switch 400) that changes the game ball detection means to a state in which the presence of a game ball is forcibly detected according to the operation of the operator when it is detected that there is no ball A game control board (for example, main board 31) on which game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for executing game control processing for controlling the progress of the game is mounted; An effect control board (for example, the effect control board 80) on which effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the electrical components is mounted, and the payout control board has an error state relating to the payout of the game ball. State notification means for outputting a state detection signal (for example, data of bits 0 to 3 and 6 of input port 1 shown in FIG. 21) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of information relating to the state of the gaming machine to be included to the game control board (For example, the part for executing the input determination process in the payout control microcomputer 370 and the output circuit 373B) are provided, and the state detection signals corresponding to each of a plurality of types of information relating to the state of the gaming machine are provided in the game control board. It is input to one input port unit (for example, input port 1 shown in FIG. 21), and the game control means State detection signal determination means for determining whether any one or more of the plurality of state detection signals input to the section have changed (for example, processing in steps S1582 and S1583 in the game control microcomputer 560) And a plurality of state detection signals input to the input port unit when the state detection signal determination means determines that one or more of the plurality of state detection signals has changed. Input port data transmission means (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S1584 to S1587 in the game control microcomputer 560) that transmits the states of the above as a command, and the effect control means includes the input port data transmission means The status of any of the multiple types of information regarding the gaming machine status changes based on the command sent by Input port data determination means (for example, steps S614, S645, S647, S648A, S648B, S650A, S650B, S651, S653, S655, S657, S659, S661, S663, S664 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) A part that executes the process of S668) and a notification control unit (for example, step S707 in the production control microcomputer 100 (step S707) in which the electrical component performs a notification corresponding to the information about the state of the gaming machine determined by the input port data determination unit). A part for executing a notification start process and a notification-in-progress process).
According to such a configuration, a state detection signal corresponding to each of a plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine is input to one input port unit on the gaming control board, and the gaming control means When it is determined whether any one or more states among a plurality of state detection signals input to the port portion have changed, and when it is determined that any one or more states have changed, the input port portion The state of the plurality of state detection signals input to is transmitted as a command collectively, and the effect control means determines which state of the plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine has changed based on the received command. Since it is configured to make the electrical component perform notification corresponding to the determined information regarding the state of the gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish and notify each of a plurality of types of information regarding the state of the gaming machine Together becomes cormorants, it is possible to not increase the control load information determination game control means in such a case. In addition, since the plurality of state detection signals are transmitted from the game control board on condition that any one or more of the plurality of state detection signals input to the input port unit have changed, the game control board It is difficult to grasp the control state of the game control means based on the signal transmitted from the player, and as a result, there is a high possibility that fraud can be prevented.

(3) A predetermined game can be performed using the game ball, and the game ball wins in a predetermined prize area provided in the game area (for example, winning openings 13, 14, 23, 29, 30, 33) , 39, the game balls are paid out based on the winning of the game balls, and each of the game balls is awarded based on the winning of the game balls in the first starting area (for example, the second starting winning port 14) provided in the gaming area. A variable display device (for example, a special symbol display 8 or a variable display device 9) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and decorative symbols) and displays and displays a display result, This is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big winning gaming state) advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device. First The game can be changed between a closed state (for example, a closed state) in which no game ball is won in the start area and an open state (for example, an open state) in which the game ball can be won in the first start area. A variable winning device (for example, variable winning ball device 15, ordinary electric accessory) that is opened based on the passing of a game ball in the starting region (for example, the gate 32) and a first starting region. A winning detection means (for example, the second start port switch 14a) for detecting the played game ball and outputting a winning detection signal, a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game An effect for controlling an effect device (for example, variable display device 9, speaker, lamp / LED, etc.) including a variable display device based on a command (for example, an effect control command) transmitted by the control means. Control means (for example, production control microcomputer 100), a game ball tank (for example, storage tank 38) capable of storing game balls used for games, and a ball through which game balls supplied from the game ball tank can pass A passage (for example, curve 樋 700), a game ball detecting means (for example, a ball break switch 197) for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the ball path, and a payout means (for example, a ball for discharging a game ball in the ball path) When the payout device 97) and the payout means are controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area to execute the payout process of the game ball, and the game ball detecting means detects that there is no game ball The payout control means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 that executes the award ball lending control process in step S756) and the game ball detection means are free of game balls. A forcible switch (for example, a forcible switch 400) that changes the game ball detection means to a state in which the presence of the game ball is forcibly detected according to the operation of the operator when The game control means is a variable display command transmission means (for example, a game control micro) for transmitting a variable display command (for example, a variation pattern command) that can specify a variable display start and a variable display time of identification information in the variable display device. A part of the decorative symbol command control process (step S29) in the computer 560 that executes control for transmitting the variation pattern command) and an open / close determining means for determining the open / closed state of the variable winning device (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560). Step S261) and the variable winning device is closed by the open / close determination means When it is determined that there is a game ball (for example, N in step S261), an abnormality for instructing the execution of abnormality notification based on the detection of a winning game ball by the winning detection means (for example, N in step S264) Including an abnormality notification command transmission means (for example, a part for executing steps S265 and S266 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting an information command (for example, an abnormal winning notification designation command), and the effect control means is a variable display command. Based on the variable display command transmitted by the transmission means, the variable display device starts variable display of the identification information, and when the variable display time elapses, variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device (for example, production Steps S800 to S803 are executed in the control microcomputer 100 Part) and abnormality notification means for executing abnormality notification by the effect device based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 100). In addition, the abnormality notification means can execute abnormality notification even when the variable display control means is executing variable display of the identification information in the variable display device (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, step S1943). (S1948, S1977-S1982, S845A, S845D can be executed).
According to such a configuration, the game control means determines whether the variable winning device is open or closed, and when the open / close determining means determines that the variable winning device is closed, the winning detection means And an abnormality notification command transmitting means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification based on the detection of the winning of the game ball. An abnormality notification means for performing abnormality notification by the effect device based on the abnormality notification command, and the abnormality notification means is abnormal even when the variable display control means is executing variable display of identification information in the variable display device. Since the notification can be executed, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the variable prize apparatus, and as a result, the variable prize apparatus It is possible to reliably prevent fraud against. In addition, since the game can be continued even when the winning abnormality is notified, the player is not disadvantaged even when the notification is made due to a malfunction.

(4) A predetermined game can be performed using the game ball, and the game ball is won in a predetermined prize area provided in the game area (for example, winning openings 13, 14, 23, 29, 30, 33) , 39, a game ball is paid out, a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other, and a display result is derived and displayed. A display device (for example, a special symbol display 8 and a variable display device 9) is provided, and a specific game state (for example, advantageous for a player when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that is shifted to the big hit game state), a variable winning ball device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that can be changed to an open state in a specific gaming state, and a variable winning game. A winning detection means (for example, a count switch 23) for detecting a game ball won in the apparatus and outputting a winning detection signal, a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game Based on a command (for example, an effect control command) transmitted by the control means, an effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the effect device including the variable display device, and a game ball used for the game A game ball tank that can be stored (for example, a storage tank 38), a ball passage (for example, a curve basket 700) through which a game ball supplied from the game ball tank can pass, and the presence or absence of a game ball in the ball passage are detected. A game ball detection means (for example, a ball break switch 197), a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out a game ball in the ball passage; Based on the winning of the game ball to the prize area, the payout means is controlled to execute the game ball payout process, and when the game ball detecting means detects that there is no game ball, the game ball payout process is stopped. The payout control means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 for executing the award ball lending control processing in step S756) and the game ball detection means detect that there is no game ball. And a forcible switch (for example, a forcible switch 400) that forcibly changes the game ball detecting means to a state in which it is detected that a game ball is present, and whether the game control means shifts to a specific game state. Predetermining means (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S57 and S58 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not the display result is derived and displayed; Variable display command transmission means (for example, game control) for transmitting a variable display command (for example, variation pattern command) that can specify the start of variable display of identification information and the variable display time based on the determination of the stage. Of the decorative symbol command control process (step S29) in the microcomputer 560 for use, and a winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the winning detection means (For example, in the game control microcomputer 560, a part for executing the processes of steps S331 to S338, S351 to S361; in particular, a part for executing the processes of steps S355 and S361 using the count switch input bit determination value); Winners in game states other than the specific game state An abnormality notification command for transmitting an abnormality notification command (for example, an abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing the execution of abnormality notification based on the input of the winning detection signal (for example, N in step S255, N in step S258) Transmission means (for example, a part for executing steps S259 and S260 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is the identification information in the variable display device based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means. Variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device when the variable display time elapses (for example, a part for executing steps S800 to S803 in the production control microcomputer 100); The abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means An abnormality notification means for executing an abnormality notification indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the event (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the processes of steps S1943 to S1948, S1977 to S1982, S845A, and S845D). ) And gaming machines.
According to such a configuration, the game control means transmits an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification based on the fact that the winning determination means inputs the winning detection signal in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state. An abnormality notification command transmission means for performing the abnormality notification means for executing an abnormality notification indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means. In addition to notifying that a winning has occurred, it is possible to continue the game and prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

(5) A player can play a predetermined game using the game ball, and the game ball is won in a predetermined prize area provided in the game area (for example, winning mouths 13, 14, 23, 29, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that pays out gaming balls based on winning of gaming balls to 30, 33, 39, and is a gaming ball tank that can store gaming balls used for gaming ( For example, a storage tank 38), a ball passage through which a game ball supplied from the game ball tank can pass (for example, curve 樋 700), and a game ball detecting means (for example, a presence or absence of a game ball in the ball passage) The ball break switch 197), a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out the game ball in the ball passage, and the payout means are controlled based on the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area. The payout process is executed, and the game ball detecting means A payout equipped with payout control means (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370 for executing the award ball lending control processing of step S756) for stopping the payout processing of the game ball when it is detected that there is no technical ball When the control board (for example, the payout control board 37) and the game ball detection means detect that there is no game ball, the game ball detection means is forced to have a game ball according to the operation of the operator. A game in which a forcible switch (for example, the forcible switch 400) for changing to a state of detecting the game and a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game is mounted. A control board (for example, the main board 31), a payout detecting means (for example, a payout number count switch 301) for detecting the payout of the game ball by the payout means, A single information output board (for example, information terminal board 34) that is connected to only the technique control board and outputs input information to an external device (for example, hall computer) provided outside the gaming machine; The control means receives control information (for example, start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, symbol determination frequency signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, time-short signal, probability variation signal) generated during execution of the game control process. Including game control information output means for outputting (for example, a portion for executing steps S1001 to S1071, S1110, and 1111 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the information output board includes control information output by the game control information output means and payout Payout information indicating that the detection means has detected the payout of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, a prize ball signal; in steps S1085 to S1111) And the input information is output to an external device (for example, output in information output processing (steps S1001 to S1071, S1085 to S1111) by the game control microcomputer 560). Game machine that inputs the received signal and outputs it to the hall computer).
According to such a configuration, the game control board on which the game control means for executing the game control process for controlling the progress of the game is mounted, the payout means for paying out the game media, and the payout control process for controlling the payout means The payout control board on which the payout control means for executing is mounted, the payout detecting means for detecting the payout of the game medium by the payout means, and the game control board are connected only, and the input information is provided outside the gaming machine. And an information output board for outputting control information generated during execution of the game control process, and the information output board includes game control information. The control information output by the output means and the payout information indicating that the payout detection means detects the payout of a predetermined number of game media are input, and the input information is output to an external device. Since the can be implemented to facilitate the wiring work for the information output board.

(6) A game board (for example, a game frame 11) installed so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and a predetermined board and various components attached to the board ( For example, the game board 6) is provided, the game board can be exchanged, the player can play a predetermined game using the game ball, and the game ball is placed in a predetermined winning area provided in the game area. Is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that pays out a gaming ball on the basis of winning a prize (for example, winning a gaming ball to winning ports 13, 14, 23, 29, 30, 33, 39) A game ball tank (for example, a storage tank 38) capable of storing game balls used for gaming, a ball path (for example, curve 樋 700) through which a game ball supplied from the game ball tank can pass, and the ball path Game ball detecting means for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball ( For example, the game is performed by controlling the payout means based on the winning of a game ball in a predetermined winning area, and a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out a game ball in the ball passage. A payout control unit that executes a ball payout process and stops the game ball payout process when the game ball detection unit detects that there is no game ball (for example, the award ball lending control process in step S756 is executed) When the payout control microcomputer 370) and the game ball detection means detect that there is no game ball, the game ball detection means forcibly detects the presence of the game ball according to the operation of the operator. The game frame is provided with a forced switch (for example, the forced switch 400) for changing to a playing state, the progress of the game is controlled, and electric parts for performance (for example, LEDs 125a to 125f, 126 of each lamp) ˜126f, 281a˜2811, 282a˜282f, 283a˜283f, motors 151a, 152a, 153a), game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting an effect control command, and game control The game board is provided with effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the electric parts for effect according to the effect control command transmitted by the means, and the game control means sends the effect control command to the effect control means. Including a command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S29 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means selects an effect electric component based on the effect control command received from the game control means. Output control signal for control by serial signal system Output means (for example, the part for executing step S708 in the production control microcomputer 100) and a board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619) provided in the game board and a game frame Are further provided with a frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615), and the board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit receives the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means as a serial signal. The system is converted from the parallel signal system, and is output to the electrical parts (for example, LED 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f of lamps, motors 151a, 152a, and 153a) provided on the game board among the electrical parts for production, Side serial-parallel conversion circuit is output means of effect control means The control signal inputted from the serial signal system is converted to the parallel signal system, and among the electrical parts for performance, the electrical parts provided in the game frame (for example, lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f) 82a to 82d, 83), and the board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or the production control means and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit are connected via one system wiring. (For example, the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus shape to be connected through one line of wiring. Each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 619 is connected to one system by being connected in a bus form or daisy chain type), and relays the connection between the panel side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit A gaming machine provided with a relay board (for example, relay board 607) that relays the connection between the relay board (for example, relay boards 606 and 607) or the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means.
According to such a configuration, the effect control means includes an output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the electric parts for the effect in a serial signal system based on the effect control command received from the game control means, The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or the effect control means and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit are configured to be connected through one line of wiring. And the number of wires between the game frames can be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the game frame and the game board are detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame and the game board. Also provided is a relay board for relaying the connection between the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or a relay board for relaying the connection between the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means. Therefore, the attachment / detachment work between the game frame and the game board can be easily performed only by performing the connection work to the relay board and the removal work.

(7) A predetermined first frame (for example, the game frame 11) and a predetermined second frame (for example, the glass door frame 2, the mechanism plate) that is rotatably attached to the predetermined first frame. 11A), and a predetermined game can be played using the game ball, and the game ball is won in a predetermined prize area provided in the game area (for example, winning openings 13, 14, 23, 29). , 30, 33, 39, winning game balls, paying out the game balls, variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other, and displaying the display results. A specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is provided with a variable display device (for example, the variable display device 9) and that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device Game machines to be transferred to Gaming machine 1), which is a game ball tank (for example, storage tank 38) capable of storing game balls used for games, and a ball passage (for example, a curve) through which game balls supplied from the game ball tank can pass樋 700), a game ball detection means (for example, a ball break switch 197) for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the ball path, and a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out a game ball in the ball path The game ball payout process is executed by controlling the payout means based on the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and the game ball detecting means detects the absence of the game ball. When the payout control means for stopping the process (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 for executing the award ball lending control process in step S756) and the game ball detecting means detect that there is no game ball, Operation In response, a forcible switch (for example, a forcible switch 400) that changes the game ball detection means to a state in which the presence of a game ball is forcibly detected, and an open for detecting that a predetermined second frame has been opened. Even when the power supply to the detection means (for example, the door opening switch (1) 154) and the gaming machine is stopped, the power supply for supplying power to the opening detection means (for example, the backup power supply 505), and the opening The detection of the opening of the predetermined second frame even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped based on the detection means detecting that the predetermined second frame has been opened. An information output board (for example, information terminal board 34) capable of outputting a frame opening detection signal (for example, door opening 1 signal) to an external device (for example, hall computer) provided outside the gaming machine A variable winning ball device (for example, special variable winning ball device 20) that can be changed to an open state in a specific gaming state, and a game ball that has won the variable winning ball device to detect a winning detection signal (for example, count switch 23). In the game control microcomputer 560 for determining whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the winning detection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560). The part which performs the process of step S331-S338, S351-S356, S361. In particular, the portion where the processing of steps S355 and S361 is executed using the count switch input bit determination value) and the winning determination means inputs the winning detection signal in the gaming state other than the specific gaming state, Based on the abnormal winning determination means (for example, the part that executes steps S255 to S258 in the game control microcomputer 560) that is determined to have occurred and the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred, An abnormality notification means (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S1943 to S1948, S1977 to S1982, S845A, and S845D in the production control microcomputer 100) that performs abnormality notification indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred. Gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to supply power to the opening detection means and the opening detection means for detecting that the predetermined second frame has been opened, and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped based on the detection of the backup power source and the opening detection means by the opening detection means, the predetermined second frame Since it is configured to include an information output board capable of outputting a frame opening detection signal indicating that opening has been detected to an external device provided outside the gaming machine, the predetermined second frame is opened. Can be effectively prevented. Further, it is assumed that an abnormal winning has occurred by the abnormal winning determination means and the abnormal winning determination means that determine that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that the winning determination means has input a winning detection signal in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state Since it is configured to include an abnormality notification means for executing an abnormality notification indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the determination, an illegal winning is generated without opening a predetermined second frame. It is also possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act performed by opening a predetermined second frame provided in the gaming machine and preventing an illegal act causing an illegal prize without opening the predetermined second frame. it can.

  The present invention is applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball apparatus (normal electric accessory)
20 Special variable winning ball equipment 31 Game control board (main board)
34 Information terminal board (information output board)
37 Dispensing control board 48 Full switch 56 CPU
51a Left award ball lamp 51b Right award ball lamp 187 Discharge number counting switch 301 Out of ball switch 370 Discharge control microcomputer 400 Forced switch 560 Game control microcomputer 78 Serial output circuit 80 Production control board 82a-82d Dish lamp (LED)
83 Operation button lamp (LED)
100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
125a-125f Center decoration lamp (LED)
126a-126f Stage lamp (LED)
281a-281l Ceiling lamp (LED)
282a-282e Left frame lamp (LED)
283a-283e Right frame lamp (LED)

Claims (1)

A variable display of a plurality of types of first identification information that can be identified based on the detection of the game ball by the specific start detection means that detects the game ball that has passed through the first start area provided in the game area. First variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and variably displaying the second identification information based on the fact that the game ball has passed the second starting area provided in the game area, and deriving and displaying the display result And a second variable display means, wherein when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means, the gaming machine shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
A variable winning device that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball does not pass through the first starting area and an open state in which the game ball can pass;
Variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device to an open state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means;
When a game ball is detected by the specific start detection means in a period other than the period in which the variable winning device is in the open state or a predetermined time elapses from the time when the variable winning device is changed from the open state to the closed state. First abnormality determining means for determining abnormality;
Variable display time setting means for setting a variable display time of the second identification information;
A state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is shortened, a state in which the predetermined display result is more easily derived and displayed on the second variable display means than in a normal state, or a time in which the variable winning device is opened Advantageous state control means for controlling to at least one advantageous state of a state that is longer than the state;
Specific game state control that controls either the first specific game state that gives a predetermined game value or the second specific game state that gives a game value lower than the first specific game state as the specific game state Means,
A special variable winning device capable of changing from a state in which the game ball does not win in the specific gaming state to a state in which it is easy to win,
Special winning detection means for detecting a game ball won in the special variable winning device;
Second abnormality determination means for determining an abnormality when a game ball is detected by the special winning detection means in a period other than the period controlled in the specific gaming state;
An abnormality notification means for notifying abnormality when at least determined as abnormal by the second abnormality determination means;
The variable display time setting means sets the variable display time to a shorter time when controlled to the advantageous state than the predetermined time,
The gaming machine, wherein the second abnormality determining means does not execute a process for determining an abnormality regardless of whether the second specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state is controlled.

Images